Documents
Resources
Learning Center
Upload
Plans & pricing Sign in
Sign Out

FL_ESOL_Keyst_6_8

VIEWS: 3 PAGES: 106

									                       K-12 English for Speakers of Other Languages K-12 (ESOL)
                                 Sunshine State Standards Correlation
                                           General Instructions

Read and comply with the 2008-2009 Instructional Materials Adoption Policies & Procedures .

Publishers must submit the required Written Correlations to the Instructional Materials office by May 1, 2008 (hardcopy
and e-mail version), and to SIMC members by June 26, 2008. Written correlations must be completed and submitted
using the forms provided. Deadlines and directions for submitting Written Correlations are found in the 2008-2009
Instructional Materials Adoption Policies & Procedures found here:
                               http://www.fldoe.org/bii/instruct_mat/0809adoption/BidInfo.asp

To determine which Written Correlation Form(s) must be completed, use the Correlations Summary found here:
                               http://data.fldoe.org/instmat/downloads/Correlations.pdf

Correlations for English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL) K-5 Series must include the Kindergarten, Grade 1,
Grade 2, Grade 3, Grade 4 and Grade 5 Worksheets.

Correlations for English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL) 6-8 Series must include the Grade 6, Grade 7 and
Grade 8 Worksheets.

Correlations for English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL) 9-12 Series must include the Grade 9-10 and Grade 11-
12 Worksheets.

Correlations for M/J Developmental Language Arts through ESOL (1002180) must include the Grade 6, Grade 7 and
Grade 8 Worksheets and correlate to the appropriate benchmarks using the Course Description found at this website as
a guide:
                     http://data.fldoe.org/crsCode/default.cfm?level=68&category=Language%20Arts


Correlations for Developmental Language Arts through ESOL (1002380) must include the Grade 9-10 and Grade 11-12
Worksheets and correlate to the appropriate benchmarks using the Course Description found at this website as a guide:
                    http://data.fldoe.org/crsCode/default.cfm?level=912&category=Language%20Arts

The K-12 Language Arts/Reading Sunshine State Standards are already included on the form for your convenience.
However, you must reference the English Language Proficiency Standards (ELPS) found in Adobe PDF format to
complete your correlation. The documents can be downloaded here:
                                        http://www.fldoe.org/bii/curriculum/sss/

Do not rename worksheet tabs.
Do not change fonts or font size.
Fields should wrap text - You may change row height to accommodate more text in a cell.
If you wish to start a new line in the same cell, use ALT +ENTER.
Enter data requested on appropriate Correlation Worksheet(s).
To print a sheet, define print area to include the entire area you wish to print. Do a print preview to make sure it is all
there. Then print.

If you have any questions, please contact Diane Vaccari.
Diane.Vaccari@fldoe.org
850-245-0808
                                                       FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION
                                                     INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS CORRELATION
                                                          SUNSHINE STATE STANDARDS


              SUBJECT:     English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL)
           CATEGORY:       M/J Language Arts 1, 2, 3 through ESOL
                                                                          *Use I for Indepth and M for Mentioned.
CATEGORY CODE NUMBER:      ESOLMJS
      SUBMISSION TITLE:    Longman Keystone (A-C)
                                                                          **Use an X to indicate English Language Proficiency Standards (ELPS) met at the
            PUBLISHER:     Pearson Longman ELT                            Beginning (B), Intermediate (I) and/or Advanced (A) levels for each standard.
             GRADE(S):     6-8

SSS STANDARD/              STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE                               ELPS MET**
ACCESS POINT               DESCRIPTION                                              TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                     I/M*       B       I      A
Grade 6: Reading Process

                           Standard: The student demonstrates the
                           ability to read grade level text orally with
Fluency                    accuracy, appropriate rate, and expression.
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 27, 41, 58, 81, 121, 124,
                                                                               158, 185, 188, 211, 249, 252, 289, 317,
                                                                               320, 385, 388; Reading Handbook: How to
                           The student will adjust reading rate based on       Improve Reading Fluency, 432–433
LA.6.1.5.1                 purpose, text difficulty, form, and style.                                                               I   X       X     X
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 27, 41, 58, 81, 121, 124,
                                                                               158, 185, 188, 211, 249, 252, 289, 317,
                                                                               320, 385, 388; Reading Handbook: How to
                                                                               Improve Reading Fluency, 432–433
LA.6.1.5.In.a              The student will read text with accuracy.                                                                I   X       X
                                                                               SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 33, 47, 73, 87,
                           The student will read text with high frequency      101, 115, 139, 153, 165, 179, 203, 217,
                           sight words and phonetically regular words with     231, 243, 267, 283, 295, 311, 335, 349,
LA.6.1.5.In.b              accuracy.                                           365, 379                                             I   X       X
                                                                               SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                               Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                               438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                                                                               preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                           The student will accurately and consistently        skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                           identify pictures or symbols paired with words in   T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.1.5.Su.a              stories and daily activities; and                                                                        I   X       X
                           The student will identify pictures or symbols       SE/TE: Strategies: follow steps in process,
                           paired with words to indicate the next step in      311; skim, 365
LA.6.1.5.Su.b              familiar daily activities.                                                                               I   X       X
                           Standard: The student uses multiple
                           strategies to develop grade appropriate
Vocabulary Development     vocabulary.



                                                                                  Grade 6                                                                   Page 2
                                                                  SE/TE: Vocabulary, 5, 19, 31, 45, 71, 85,
                                                                  99, 113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201, 215,
                                                                  229, 241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333, 347,
                                                                  363, 377; Academic Words, 6, 20, 32, 46,
                                                                  72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152, 164, 178, 202,
             The student will use new vocabulary that is          216, 230, 242, 266, 282, 294, 310, 334,
LA.6.1.6.1   introduced and taught directly;                      348, 364, 378                                 I   X   X   X
                                                                  Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre, 8–13, 22–25,
                                                                  22–25, 34–39, 48–53, 74–79, 88–93,
                                                                  102–107, 116–117, 118–119, 140–145,
                                                                  154–157, 166–171, 180–183, 204–209,
                                                                  218–221, 222, 223, 232–233, 234–236,
                                                                  244–247, 268–275, 284–287, 284–287,
             The student will listen to, read, and discuss        296–303, 312–315, 336–341, 350–353,
LA.6.1.6.2   familiar and conceptually challenging text;          354–357, 366–371, 380–383                     I   X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 31, 45,
                                                                  71, 85, 99, 113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201,
                                                                  215, 229, 241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333,
                                                                  347, 363, 377; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                  6, 20, 32, 46, 72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152,
             The student will use context clues to determine      164, 178, 202, 216, 230, 242, 266, 282,
LA.6.1.6.3   meanings of unfamiliar words;                        294, 310, 334, 348, 364, 378                  I   X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 33, 47, 73, 87,
                                                                  101, 115, 139, 153, 165, 179, 203, 217,
             The student will categorize key vocabulary and       231, 243, 267, 283, 295, 311, 335, 349,
LA.6.1.6.4   identify salient features;                           365, 379                                      I   X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 31, 45,
                                                                  71, 85, 99, 113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201,
                                                                  215, 229, 241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333,
                                                                  347, 363, 377; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                  6, 20, 32, 46, 72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152,
             The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar   164, 178, 202, 216, 230, 242, 266, 282,
LA.6.1.6.5   words;                                               294, 310, 334, 348, 364, 378                  I   X   X   X
             The student will distinguish denotative and          For related activities see: SE/TE: Word
LA.6.1.6.6   connotative meanings of words;                       Study: Synonyms and antonyms, 165             I   X   X   X
             The student will identify and understand the         SE/TE: Prefixes, 7, 295; Suffixes, 87, 311;
             meaning of conceptually advanced prefixes,           Greek and Latin Roots, 179, 349
LA.6.1.6.7   suffixes, and root words;                                                                          I   X   X   X
                                                               SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 33, 47, 73, 87,
                                                               101, 115, 139, 153, 165, 179, 203, 217,
             The student will identify advanced word/phrase    231, 243, 267, 283, 295, 311, 335, 349,
LA.6.1.6.8   relationships and their meanings;                 365, 379                                         I   X   X   X
             The student will determine the correct meaning of SE/TE: Multiple–Meaning Words, 203, 379
LA.6.1.6.9   words with multiple meanings in context;                                                           I   X   X   X




                                                                     Grade 6                                                    Page 3
                The student will determine meanings of words,        SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                pronunciation, parts of speech, etymologies, and     dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                alternate word choices by using a dictionary,        TE: Dictionary, T51, T77, T143, T209,
LA.6.1.6.10     thesaurus, and digital tools; and                    T301, T351, T367                              I   X   X   X
                The student will identify the meaning of words       SE/TE: Greek and Latin Roots, 179, 349;
                and phrases derived from Greek and Latin             Vocabulary (tsunami), 177
                mythology (e.g., mercurial, Achilles' heel) and
                identify frequently used words from other
LA.6.1.6.11     languages (e.g., laissez faire, croissant).                                                        I   X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Vocabulary, 5, 19, 31, 45, 71, 85,
                                                                     99, 113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201, 215,
                                                                     229, 241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333, 347,
                                                                     363, 377; Academic Words, 6, 20, 32, 46,
                                                                     72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152, 164, 178, 202,
                The student will use new vocabulary that is          216, 230, 242, 266, 282, 294, 310, 334,
LA.6.1.6.In.a   introduced and taught directly;                      348, 364, 378                                 I   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre, 8–13, 22–25,
                                                                     22–25, 34–39, 48–53, 74–79, 88–93,
                                                                     102–107, 116–117, 118–119, 140–145,
                                                                     154–157, 166–171, 180–183, 204–209,
                                                                     218–221, 222, 223, 232–233, 234–236,
                                                                     244–247, 268–275, 284–287, 284–287,
                The student will listen to, read, and discuss a      296–303, 312–315, 336–341, 350–353,
LA.6.1.6.In.b   variety of text;                                     354–357, 366–371, 380–383                     I   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 31, 45,
                                                                   71, 85, 99, 113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201,
                                                                   215, 229, 241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333,
                                                                   347, 363, 377; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                   6, 20, 32, 46, 72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152,
                The student will use context clues and graphics to 164, 178, 202, 216, 230, 242, 266, 282,
LA.6.1.6.In.c   determine meaning of unknown words;                294, 310, 334, 348, 364, 378                    I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 33, 47, 73, 87,
                                                                     101, 115, 139, 153, 165, 179, 203, 217,
                                                                     231, 243, 267, 283, 295, 311, 335, 349,
LA.6.1.6.In.d   The student will categorize key vocabulary;          365, 379                                      I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 31, 45,
                                                                     71, 85, 99, 113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201,
                                                                     215, 229, 241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333,
                                                                     347, 363, 377; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                     6, 20, 32, 46, 72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152,
                The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar   164, 178, 202, 216, 230, 242, 266, 282,
LA.6.1.6.In.e   words;                                               294, 310, 334, 348, 364, 378                  I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 33, 47, 73, 87,
                                                                     101, 115, 139, 153, 165, 179, 203, 217,
                The student will use phonics skills to decode        231, 243, 267, 283, 295, 311, 335, 349,
LA.6.1.6.In.f   complex word families (e.g., -ieve);                 365, 379                                      I   X   X



                                                                        Grade 6                                                    Page 4
                The student will recognize and use prefixes (re-, SE/TE: Prefixes, 7, 295; Suffixes, 87, 311;
LA.6.1.6.In.g   un-), suffixes (-s, -es), and irregular plurals;  Greek and Latin Roots, 179, 349                  I   X   X
                The student will determine the correct meaning of SE/TE: Multiple–Meaning Words, 203, 379
                a word with multiple meanings (e.g., homographs)
LA.6.1.6.In.h   in context; and                                                                                    I   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                The student will determine the meaning of         dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                unknown words using a dictionary and digital      TE: Dictionary, T51, T77, T143, T209,
LA.6.1.6.In.i   tools.                                            T301, T351, T367                                 I   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                  meet individual needs: Vocabulary, 5, 19,
                                                                  31, 45, 71, 85, 99, 113, 137, 151, 163,
                                                                  177, 201, 215, 229, 241, 265, 281, 293,
                                                                  309, 333, 347, 363, 377; Academic Words,
                                                                  6, 20, 32, 46, 72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152,
                The student will use new vocabulary that is       164, 178, 202, 216, 230, 242, 266, 282,
LA.6.1.6.Su.a   introduced and taught directly;                   294, 310, 334, 348, 364, 378                     I   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre, 8–13, 22–25,
                                                                     22–25, 34–39, 48–53, 74–79, 88–93,
                                                                     102–107, 116–117, 118–119, 140–145,
                                                                     154–157, 166–171, 180–183, 204–209,
                                                                     218–221, 222, 223, 232–233, 234–236,
                                                                     244–247, 268–275, 284–287, 284–287,
                The student will listen to, read, and discuss a      296–303, 312–315, 336–341, 350–353,
LA.6.1.6.Su.b   variety of text;                                     354–357, 366–371, 380–383                     I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 31, 45,
                                                                     71, 85, 99, 113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201,
                                                                     215, 229, 241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333,
                                                                     347, 363, 377; Academic Words: Practice,
                The student will use context clues and               6, 20, 32, 46, 72, 86, 100, 114, 138, 152,
                illustrations to determine meaning of unknown        164, 178, 202, 216, 230, 242, 266, 282,
LA.6.1.6.Su.c   words;                                               294, 310, 334, 348, 364, 378                  I   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Linguistic Note (Word Study), 7,
                                                                     21, 33, 47, 73, 87, 101, 115, 139, 153,
                                                                     165, 179, 203, 217, 231, 243, 267, 283,
LA.6.1.6.Su.d   The student will categorize key vocabulary;          295, 311, 335, 349, 365, 379                  I   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction
                                                                     (Vocabulary), 5, 19, 31, 45, 71, 85, 99,
                                                                     113, 137, 151, 163, 177, 201, 215, 229,
                The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar   241, 265, 281, 293, 309, 333, 347, 363,
LA.6.1.6.Su.e   words;                                               377                                           I   X   X
                The student will use phonics skills to decode        SE/TE: Word Study: Digraphs, 21, 283;
                words with common consonant blends,                  Spellings for r–controlled vowels, 231
                consonant and vowel digraphs, and r-controlled
LA.6.1.6.Su.f   vowels;                                                                                            I   X   X
                The student will recognize and use regular           SE/TE: Word Study: Compound nouns, 47
LA.6.1.6.Su.g   plurals, compound words, and contractions;                                                         I   X   X

                                                                        Grade 6                                                Page 5
                        The student will recognize common synonyms         SE/TE: Word Study: Synonyms and
LA.6.1.6.Su.h           and antonyms; and                                  antonyms, 165                                   I   X   X
                                                                           SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                        The student will determine the meaning of          dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                        unknown words using a picture dictionary and       TE: Dictionary, T51, T77, T143, T209,
LA.6.1.6.Su.i           digital tools.                                     T301, T351, T367                                I   X   X
                                                                           SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                           meet individual needs: Vocabulary, 5, 19,
                                                                           31, 45, 71, 85, 99, 113, 137, 151, 163,
                        The student will respond to new vocabulary that is 177, 201, 215, 229, 241, 265, 281, 293,
LA.6.1.6.Pa.a           introduced and taught directly;                    309, 333, 347, 363, 377                         I   X
                                                                             SE/TE: Review and Practice, 14, 26, 40,
                                                                             54, 80, 94, 108, 120, 146, 158, 172, 184,
                        The student will listen and respond to stories and 210, 224, 236, 248, 276, 288, 304, 316,
LA.6.1.6.Pa.b           informational text;                                  342, 358, 372, 384                            I   X
                        The student will identify familiar persons, objects, SE/TE: In Your Own Words, 26, 41, 80,
LA.6.1.6.Pa.c           and actions by name; and                             120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288, 316, 342        I   X
                                                                             SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                             Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                             438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                                                                             preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                        The student will select and respond to objects,      skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                        pictures, or symbols paired with words in familiar T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.1.6.Pa.d           classroom activities.                                                                              I   X
                        Standard: The student uses a variety of
Reading Comprehension   strategies to comprehend grade level text.
                                                                             SE/TE: Strategies: Predict, 7; Preview, 33;
                                                                             Prepare to Read: Background Knowledge,
                                                                             4, 18, 30, 44, 70, 84, 98, 112, 136, 150,
                                                                             162, 176, 200, 214, 228, 240, 264, 280,
                                                                             292, 308, 332, 346, 362, 376; Set a
                        The student will use background knowledge of
                                                                             Purpose for Reading, 8, 22, 34, 48, 74, 88,
                        subject and related content areas, prereading
                                                                             102, 116, 118, 140, 154, 166, 180, 204,
                        strategies, graphic representations, and
                                                                             218, 222, 223, 232, 234, 244, 246, 268,
                        knowledge of text structure to make and confirm
                                                                             284, 296, 312, 315, 336, 350, 354, 366,
                        complex predictions of content, purpose, and
                                                                             380
LA.6.1.7.1              organization of a reading selection;                                                               I   X   X   X
                                                                             SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author's
                        The student will analyze the authors purpose         Purpose, 231; Link the Readings, 252;
                        (e.g., to persuade, inform, entertain, or explain)   also see: About the Author, 13, 25, 53, 93,
                        and perspective in a variety of texts and            107, 145, 171, 209, 221, 222, 223, 233,
LA.6.1.7.2              understand how they affect meaning;                  275, 353, 371                                 I   X   X   X
                        The student will determine the main idea or          SE/TE: Identify Main Idea and Details,
                        essential message in grade-level text through        179; Before You Go On, 181; In Your Own
                        inferring, paraphrasing, summarizing, and            Words, 184, 248
LA.6.1.7.3              identifying relevant details;                                                                      I   X   X   X




                                                                               Grade 6                                                     Page 6
                                                                   SE/TE: Recognize Cause and Effect, 243;
                                                                   Before You Go On, 245, 247; In Your Own
                The student will identify cause-and-effect         Words, 184; Sentence Fluency, 251
LA.6.1.7.4      relationships in text;                                                                            I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Strategies: analyze text structure,
                The student will analyze a variety of text         267, 349; also see: Strategies: recognize
                structures (e.g., comparison/contrast,             sequence, 101, identify problems and
                cause/effect, chronological order,                 solutions, 153, recognize cause and effect,
                argument/support, lists) and text features (main   243, classify, 283, follow steps in process,
                headings with subheadings) and explain their       311
LA.6.1.7.5      impact on meaning in text;                                                                        I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: For related information see: Moral,
                The student will analyze and evaluate similar      229; Literary Check, 233; Comprehension,
                themes or topics by different authors across a     236; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.6.1.7.6      variety of fiction and nonfiction selections;      188, 252, 320, 390                             I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Compare and Contrast, 155; also
                The student will compare and contrast elements see: Link the Readings, 58, 124, 188, 252,
LA.6.1.7.7      in multiple texts; and                             320, 390                                       I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Before You Go On, 9, 11, 13, 23,
                                                                   25, 35, 37, 39, 49, 51, 53, 75, 77, 79, 89,
                The student will use strategies to repair          91, 93, 103, 105, 107, 119, 141, 143, 145,
                comprehension of grade-appropriate text when       155, 157, 167, 169, 171, 181, 183, 205,
                self-monitoring indicates confusion, including but 207, 209, 219, 221, 223, 233, 235, 245,
                not limited to rereading, checking context clues, 247, 269, 271, 273, 275, 285, 287, 297,
                predicting, note-making, summarizing, using        299, 301, 303, 313, 315, 337, 339, 341,
                graphic and semantic organizers, questioning,      351, 353, 355, 357, 367, 371, 375, 383
LA.6.1.7.8      and clarifying by checking other sources.                                                         I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Reading Strategy, Predict, 7;
                                                                   Preview, 33; Maps and Diagrams,
                                                                   434–435; Graphs, 436–437; Graphic
                                                                   Organizers, 438; Strategies: use visuals,
                                                                   21, 115; preview, 33; follow steps in
                                                                   process, 311; skim, 365; also see: Set a
                The student will use background knowledge of
                                                                   Purpose for Reading, 8, 22, 34, 48, 74, 88,
                the subject, guided previewing strategies, graphic
                                                                   102, 116, 118, 140, 154, 166, 180, 204,
                representations, and text features (e.g., table of
                                                                   218, 222, 223, 232, 234, 244, 246, 268,
                contents, headings, simple charts, maps) to make
                                                                   284, 296, 312, 315, 336, 350, 354, 366,
                and confirm predictions of content and purpose of
                                                                   380 ; Expressing predictions, 344
LA.6.1.7.In.a   reading selections;                                                                               I   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author's
                                                                   Purpose, 231; Link the Readings, 252;
                The student will identify the author’s purpose     also see: About the Author, 13, 25, 53, 93,
                (e.g., to inform, entertain, persuade) using key   107, 145, 171, 209, 221, 222, 223, 233,
LA.6.1.7.In.b   words, phrases, and graphics in text;              275, 353, 371                                  I   X   X
                The student will determine the main idea or        SE/TE: Identify Main Idea and Details,
                essential message in text through identifying      179; Before You Go On, 181; In Your Own
LA.6.1.7.In.c   relevant details and facts;                        Words, 184, 248                                I   X   X



                                                                      Grade 6                                                     Page 7
                                                                          SE/TE: Recognize Cause and Effect, 243;
                                                                          Before You Go On, 245, 247; In Your Own
                The student will identify cause and effect                Words, 184; Sentence Fluency, 251
LA.6.1.7.In.d   relationships in stories and informational text;                                                         I   X   X
                                                                          SE/TE: Strategies: analyze text structure,
                                                                          267, 349; also see: Strategies: recognize
                The student will identify text structures (e.g.,          sequence, 101, identify problems and
                comparison/contrast, explicit cause/effect                solutions, 153, recognize cause and effect,
                relationships, sequence of events) in narrative           243, classify, 283, follow steps in process,
                and informational text using strategies, including        311
LA.6.1.7.In.e   graphic organizers;                                                                                      I   X   X
                                                                          SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 30, 44,
                                                                          70, 84, 98, 112, 136, 150, 162, 176, 200,
                                                                          214, 228, 240, 264, 280, 292, 308, 332,
                The student will identify the theme in fiction or         346, 362, 376; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.6.1.7.In.f   nonfiction selections;                                    188, 252, 320, 388                             I   X   X
                The student will identify similarities and                SE/TE: Compare and Contrast, 155; also
                differences in characters, actions, or settings in        see: Link the Readings, 58, 124, 188, 252,
LA.6.1.7.In.g   two texts; and                                            320, 390                                       I   X   X
                                                                          SE/TE: Before You Go On, 9, 11, 13, 23,
                                                                          25, 35, 37, 39, 49, 51, 53, 75, 77, 79, 89,
                                                                          91, 93, 103, 105, 107, 119, 141, 143, 145,
                                                                          155, 157, 167, 169, 171, 181, 183, 205,
                The student will use strategies to repair                 207, 209, 219, 221, 223, 233, 235, 245,
                comprehension, including but not limited to               247, 269, 271, 273, 275, 285, 287, 297,
                rereading, checking context clues, predicting,            299, 301, 303, 313, 315, 337, 339, 341,
                using graphic organizers, and requesting                  351, 353, 355, 357, 367, 371, 375, 383
LA.6.1.7.In.h   assistance for clarification.                                                                            I   X   X
                                                                          SE/TE: Preview, 33; Maps and Diagrams,
                                                                          434–435; Graphs, 436–437; Graphic
                                                                          Organizers, 438; Strategies: use visuals,
                                                                          21, 115; preview, 33; follow steps in
                                                                          process, 311; skim, 365; also see: Set a
                                                                          Purpose for Reading, 8, 22, 34, 48, 74, 88,
                                                                          102, 116, 118, 140, 154, 166, 180, 204,
                                                                          218, 222, 223, 232, 234, 244, 246, 268,
                The student will use background knowledge of
                                                                          284, 296, 312, 315, 336, 350, 354, 366,
                the subject and text features (e.g., illustrations,
                                                                          380 ; Expressing predictions, 344
                title) to make predictions of content of reading
LA.6.1.7.Su.a   selections;                                                                                              I   X   X
                                                                          SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author's
                                                                          Purpose, 231; Link the Readings, 252;
                The student will identify the author’s purpose            also see: About the Author, 13, 25, 53, 93,
                (e.g., tell a story, give information, elicit feelings)   107, 145, 171, 209, 221, 222, 223, 233,
LA.6.1.7.Su.b   in a variety of texts with graphics;                      275, 353, 371                                  I   X   X




                                                                             Grade 6                                                 Page 8
                The student will determine the main idea or           SE/TE: Identify Main Idea and Details,
                essential message in text through identifying         179; Before You Go On, 181; In Your Own
                relevant details, including who, what, where, and     Words, 184, 248
LA.6.1.7.Su.c   when;                                                                                               I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Recognize Cause and Effect, 243;
                The student will identify explicit cause and effect   Before You Go On, 245, 247; In Your Own
                relationships in read-aloud stories and               Words, 184; Sentence Fluency, 251
LA.6.1.7.Su.d   informational text;                                                                                 I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: For related information see: Moral,
                                                                      229; Literary Check, 233; Comprehension,
                The student will identify fiction or nonfiction       236; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.6.1.7.Su.e   selections based on a theme;                          188, 252, 320, 390                            I   X   X
                The student will identify similarities and            SE/TE: Compare and Contrast, 155; also
                differences in characters and settings in stories     see: Link the Readings, 58, 124, 188, 252,
                using strategies, including simple graphic            320, 390
LA.6.1.7.Su.f   organizers; and                                                                                     I   X   X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Monitor Progress (before you go
                                                                      on), 9, 11, 13, 23, 25, 35, 37, 39, 49, 51,
                                                                      53, 75, 77, 79, 89, 91, 93, 103, 105, 107,
                                                                      119, 141, 143, 145, 155, 157, 167, 169,
                The student will uses strategies to repair            171, 181, 183, 205, 207, 209, 219, 221,
                comprehension, including but not limited to           223, 233, 235, 245, 247, 269, 271, 273,
                rereading, checking context clues, predicting,        275, 285, 287, 297, 299, 301, 303, 313,
                using graphic organizers, and checking own            315, 337, 339, 341, 351, 353, 355, 357,
LA.6.1.7.Su.g   understanding when reminded.                          367, 371, 375, 383                            I   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre, 8–13, 22–25,
                                                                     22–25, 34–39, 48–53, 74–79, 88–93,
                                                                     102–107, 116–117, 118–119, 140–145,
                                                                     154–157, 166–171, 180–183, 204–209,
                                                                     218–221, 222, 223, 232–233, 234–236,
                The student will identify persons, objects, actions, 244–247, 268–275, 284–287, 284–287,
                or events in read-aloud narrative and                296–303, 312–315, 336–341, 350–353,
LA.6.1.7.Pa.a   informational text used in daily activities;         354–357, 366–371, 380–383                      I   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                     Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                     438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                                                                     preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                The student will respond to pictures or symbols      skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                paired with words used to guide classroom            T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.1.7.Pa.b   activities;                                                                                         I   X




                                                                         Grade 6                                                Page 9
                                                                                   Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre, 8–13, 22–25,
                                                                                   22–25, 34–39, 48–53, 74–79, 88–93,
                                                                                   102–107, 116–117, 118–119, 140–145,
                                                                                   154–157, 166–171, 180–183, 204–209,
                                                                                   218–221, 222, 223, 232–233, 234–236,
                                                                                   244–247, 268–275, 284–287, 284–287,
                             The student will recognize details in read-aloud      296–303, 312–315, 336–341, 350–353,
LA.6.1.7.Pa.c                stories and informational text;                       354–357, 366–371, 380–383                     I   X
                                                                                   SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                                   Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                                   438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                                                                                   preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                             The student will use pictures or symbols paired       skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                             with words to achieve cause/effect outcomes in        T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.1.7.Pa.d                daily classroom activities;                                                                         I   X
                                                                                   Add’l TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 30, 44,
                                                                                   70, 84, 98, 112, 136, 150, 162, 176, 200,
                                                                                   214, 228, 240, 264, 280, 292, 308, 332,
                             The student will recognize familiar read-aloud        346, 362, 376; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.6.1.7.Pa.e                stories with a theme (e.g., friendship); and          188, 252, 320, 388                            I   X
                                                                                   SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                             The student will use a resource when necessary        dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                             to clarify meaning of pictures, symbols, or words     TE: Dictionary, T51, T77, T143, T209,
LA.6.1.7.Pa.f                in classroom activities.                              T301, T351, T367                              I   X
Grade 6: Literary Analysis

                             Standard: The student identifies, analyzes,
                             and applies knowledge of the elements of a
                             variety of fiction and literary texts to develop a
Fiction                      thoughtful response to a literary selection.
                                                                                   SE/TE: Genre: novel excerpt, 8–13,
                                                                                   88–93, 102–107, 140–145, 296–303,
                             The student will identify the characteristics of      366–371, short story, 48–53, folk tale,
                             various genres (e.g., poetry, fiction, short story,   118–119, poetry, 218–221, 222, 223,
                             dramatic literature) as forms with distinct           350–353, fable, 232–233, myth, 234–236,
LA.6.2.1.1                   characteristics and purposes;                         play, 268–275                                 I   X   X   X
                             The student will locate and analyze the elements      SE/TE: Literary terms: plot, 99; Literary
                             of plot structure, including exposition, setting,     Check, 103, 106; Expository Writing: Plot
                             character development, rising/falling action,         Summary, 307; also see: characters, 5;
                             conflict/resolution, and theme in a variety of        Literary Check, 9, 10, 13
LA.6.2.1.2                   fiction;                                                                                            I   X   X   X
                             The student will locate and analyze the effects of    SE/TE: Literary terms: rhyme scheme,
                             sound, meter, figurative and descriptive              rhythm, 215; Literary check, 219, 220, 223;
                             language, graphics (illustrations), and structure     metaphor, simile, 347; Literary check, 351;
                             (e.g., line length, fonts, word placement) to         also see: Read Poetry Aloud, 224
LA.6.2.1.3                   communicate mood and meaning;                                                                       I   X   X   X



                                                                                      Grade 6                                                    Page 10
                                                                       SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 30, 44,
                                                                       70, 84, 98, 112, 136, 150, 162, 176, 200,
                The student will identify and explain recurring        214, 228, 240, 264, 280, 292, 308, 332,
                themes across a variety of works (e.g., bravery,       346, 362, 376; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.6.2.1.4      friendship, loyalty, good vs. evil);                   188, 252, 320, 388                              I   X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Literary response and evaluation:
                                                                       analyzing text, 27, 210; Projects: Oral Book
                                                                       Report, 389; also see: Response to
                                                                       Literature, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81, 95, 109, 121,
                The student will develop an interpretation of a        147, 159, 173, 185, 211, 225, 237, 249,
                selection and support through sustained use of         277, 289, 305, 317, 343, 359, 373, 385
LA.6.2.1.5      examples and contextual evidence;                                                                      I   X   X   X
                The student will write a book report, review, or       SE /TE: Persuasive Writing: Book Review,
                critique that compares two or more works by the        149; Projects: Oral Book Report, 389
LA.6.2.1.6      same author;                                                                                           I   X   X   X
                The student will locate and analyze an author's    SE/TE: Literary terms: idioms, 45; Literary
                use of allusions and descriptive, idiomatic, and   Check, 48; figure of speech, hyperbole,
                figurative language in a variety of literary text, 163; metaphor, simile, 347; Literary check,
                identifying how word choice sets the author's tone 351; also see: Read Poetry Aloud, 224
LA.6.2.1.7      and advances the work's theme;                                                                         I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Genre: myth, 234–236; folk tale,
                The student will compare language patterns and 118–119; fable, 232–233; also see:
                vocabulary of contemporary texts to those of       Projects: Continue Story, 59, Retell a
LA.6.2.1.8      historical texts;                                  Folktale, 125                                       I   X   X   X
                The student will explain how ideas, values, and    SE/TE: Genre: historical fiction, 110–115
                themes of a literary work often reflect the
LA.6.2.1.9      historical period in which it was written; and                                                         I   X   X   X
                The student will use interest and recommendation SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                of others to select a balance of age and ability   253, 321, 389
                appropriate fiction materials to read (e.g., novels,
                historical fiction, mythology, poetry) to expand the
                core foundation of knowledge necessary to
                function as a fully literate member of a shared
LA.6.2.1.10     culture.                                                                                               I   X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Genre: novel excerpt, 8–13,
                                                                     88–93, 102–107, 140–145, 296–303,
                                                                     366–371, short story, 48–53, folk tale,
                                                                     118–119, poetry, 218–221, 222, 223,
                The student will identify characteristics of various 350–353, fable, 232–233, myth, 234–236,
LA.6.2.1.In.a   genres of literature (e.g., fiction, poetry, drama); play, 268–275                                     I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Literary terms: setting, 85, 363;
                                                                     plot, 99; Literary Check, 103, 106; setting
                                                                     the scene, 265; Expository Writing: Plot
                The student will identify characters, setting, plot  Summary, 307; also see: characters, 5;
LA.6.2.1.In.b   structure, and theme in works of literature;         Literary Check, 9, 10, 13                         I   X   X




                                                                          Grade 6                                                      Page 11
                The student will identify literary devices (e.g.,       SE/TE: Literary terms, 5, 9, 10, 13, 45, 48,
                sound, descriptive language) that communicate           53, 85, 85, 99, 137, 163, 215, 229, 265,
LA.6.2.1.In.c   feelings and meaning;                                   293, 347, 363                                  I   X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 30, 44,
                                                                        70, 84, 98, 112, 136, 150, 162, 176, 200,
                                                                        214, 228, 240, 264, 280, 292, 308, 332,
                The student will identify themes (e.g., bravery,        346, 362, 376; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.6.2.1.In.d   friendship, caring) in fiction;                         188, 252, 320, 388                             I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Response to Literature:
                                                                      Description, 15, Diary Entry, 277; Literary
                                                                      response and evaluation: writing travel
                                                                      brochures, 95, writing journal entries, 109,
                The student will write a reflection that describes    147, 277, writing from another point of
                how the characters, problem/solution, or theme in view, 305, writing about the future, 343,
LA.6.2.1.In.e   a literature selection connect to life experiences; 373                                                I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Response to Literature, 15, 27, 41,
                The student will write a brief review or report on    55, 81, 95, 109, 121, 147, 159, 173, 185,
                literature that includes a description of characters, 211, 225, 237, 249, 277, 289, 305, 317,
                setting, plot structure (e.g., problem/solution and 343, 359, 373, 385
LA.6.2.1.In.f   sequence of events), and theme;                                                                        I   X   X
                The student will recognize the meaning of             SE/TE: Idioms, 45; Animal verbs and
                common idioms (e.g., hands off) and figurative        idioms, 101
LA.6.2.1.In.g   language (e.g., runs like a deer);                                                                     I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Genre: myth, 234–236; folk tale,
                The student will identify examples of past and        118–119; fable, 232–233; also see:
                present language in literature of different           Projects: Continue Story, 59, Retell a
LA.6.2.1.In.h   historical periods;                                   Folktale, 125                                    I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 30, 44,
                                                                      70, 84, 98, 112, 136, 150, 162, 176, 200,
                The student will identify themes (e.g., growing up, 214, 228, 240, 264, 280, 292, 308, 332,
                solving problems) in fiction texts of different       346, 362, 376; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.6.2.1.In.i   historical periods; and                               188, 252, 320, 388                               I   X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                The student will select a variety of fiction            253, 321, 389
                materials based on interest or recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.6.2.1.In.j   member of a shared culture.                                                                            I   X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Genre: novel excerpt, 8–13,
                                                                        88–93, 102–107, 140–145, 296–303,
                                                                        366–371, short story, 48–53, folk tale,
                                                                        118–119, poetry, 218–221, 222, 223,
                The student will identify basic characteristics of      350–353, fable, 232–233, myth, 234–236,
LA.6.2.1.Su.a   various genres of literature (e.g., fiction, poetry);   play, 268–275                                  I   X   X




                                                                           Grade 6                                                 Page 12
                                                                     SE/TE: Literary terms: characters, 5, 9, 10,
                The student will identify characters, setting,       13; narrator, plot, 99; setting, 85, 363;
                events, and main problem in read-aloud works of      suspense, 137; setting the scene, 265
LA.6.2.1.Su.b   literature;                                                                                          I   X   X
                The student will identify literary devices (e.g.,    SE/TE: Literary terms, 5, 9, 10, 13, 45, 48,
                words that describe people, objects, feelings) in    53, 85, 85, 99, 137, 163, 215, 229, 265,
LA.6.2.1.Su.c   literature;                                          293, 347, 363                                   I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Genre: myth, 234–236; folk tale,
                                                                     118–119; also see: The Big Question, 4,
                                                                     18, 30, 44, 70, 84, 98, 112, 136, 150, 162,
                                                                     176, 200, 214, 228, 240, 264, 280, 292,
                The student will identify stories or drama based     308, 332, 346, 362, 376; Link the
LA.6.2.1.Su.d   on a theme (e.g., bravery, friendship);              Readings, 58, 124, 188, 252, 320, 388           I   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction, 15, 27,
                The student will write a reflection that relates the 41, 55, 81, 95, 109, 121, 147, 159, 173,
                main idea or problem/solution in a read-aloud        185, 211, 225, 237, 249, 277, 289, 305,
LA.6.2.1.Su.e   literature selection to life experiences;            317, 343, 359, 373, 385                         I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Response to Literature:
                                                                     Description, 15, Diary Entry, 277; Literary
                                                                     response and evaluation: writing travel
                                                                     brochures, 95, writing journal entries, 109,
                The student will write a brief report or review of a 147, 277, writing from another point of
                story with illustrations that identifies characters, view, 305, writing about the future, 343,
LA.6.2.1.Su.f   settings, events, or main problem;                   373                                             I   X   X
                The student will recognize the meaning of            SE/TE: Idioms, 45; Animal verbs and
LA.6.2.1.Su.g   common idioms (e.g., cross your fingers);            idioms, 101                                     I   X   X
                The student will recognize language in familiar      For related activities see: SE/TE: Genre:
LA.6.2.1.Su.h   stories reflecting different historical periods;     myth, 234–236; folk tale, 118–119               I   X   X
                The student will identify stories of different       For related activities see: SE/TE: Genre:
                historical periods based on a theme (e.g., growing myth, 234–236; folk tale, 118–119; also
LA.6.2.1.Su.i   up); and                                             see: Retell a Folktale, 125                     I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                The student will select a variety of fiction         253, 321, 389
                materials based on interest or recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.6.2.1.Su.j   member of a shared culture.                                                                          I   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: novel excerpt,
                                                                     8–13, 88–93, 102–107, 140–145,
                                                                     296–303, 366–371, short story, 48–53, folk
                                                                     tale, 118–119, poetry, 218–221, 222, 223,
                The student will identify characters, objects,       350–353, fable, 232–233, myth, 234–236,
LA.6.2.1.Pa.a   actions, and feelings in read-aloud literature;      play, 268–275                                   I   X




                                                                        Grade 6                                                  Page 13
                                                                     SE/TE: Literary terms: rhyme scheme,
                                                                     rhythm, 215; Literary check, 219, 220, 223;
                                                                     metaphor, simile, 347; Literary check, 351;
                The student will recognize rhythm, sounds, and       also see: Read Poetry Aloud, 224
LA.6.2.1.Pa.b   words in read-aloud poetry and stories;                                                              I   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: novel excerpt,
                                                                     8–13, 88–93, 102–107, 140–145,
                                                                     296–303, 366–371, short story, 48–53, folk
                                                                     tale, 118–119, poetry, 218–221, 222, 223,
                The student will recognize familiar read-aloud       350–353, fable, 232–233, myth, 234–236,
LA.6.2.1.Pa.c   stories with a theme (e.g., friendship);             play, 268–275                                   I   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction, 15, 27,
                The student will use pictures, symbols, or words     41, 55, 81, 95, 109, 121, 147, 159, 173,
                to identify characters, objects, actions, and        185, 211, 225, 237, 249, 277, 289, 305,
LA.6.2.1.Pa.d   feelings from familiar read-aloud literature; and    317, 343, 359, 373, 385                         I   X
                The student will select fiction materials based on   SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                interest or recommendations to expand the core       253, 321, 389
                foundation of knowledge necessary to function as
LA.6.2.1.Pa.e   a member of a shared culture.                                                                        I   X

                Standard: The student identifies, analyzes,
                and applies knowledge of the elements of a
                variety of non-fiction, informational, and
                expository texts to demonstrate an
Non-Fiction     understanding of the information presented.
                                                                     SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                     Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                     438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                The student will locate, use, and analyze specific preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                information from organizational text features (e.g., skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                table of contents, headings, captions, bold print, T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.2.2.1      italics, glossaries, indices, key/guide words);                                                      I   X   X   X
                The student will use information from the text to    SE/TE: Strategies: recognize sequence,
                answer questions related to the main idea or         101; identify main idea and details, 179;
                relevant details, maintaining chronological or       analyze text structure, 267, 349; follow
LA.6.2.2.2      logical order;                                       steps in process, 311                           I   X   X   X
                The student will organize information to show        SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57,
                understanding (e.g., representing main ideas         62, 83, 97, 111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175,
                within text through charting, mapping,               187, 192, 213, 227, 239, 251, 256, 277,
                paraphrasing, summarizing, or                        279, 291, 307, 317, 319, 324, 345, 361,
LA.6.2.2.3      comparing/contrasting);                              375, 387, 392                                   I   X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Genre: math text, 22–25; social
                The student will identify the characteristics of a   studies text, 34–39, 74–79, 154–157,
                variety of types of nonfiction text (e.g., reference 204–209, 284–287, 336–341; science text,
                works, newspapers, biographies, procedures,          116–117, 180–183, 244–247, 312–315,
LA.6.2.2.4      instructions, practical/functional texts); and       380–383                                         I   X   X   X



                                                                        Grade 6                                                      Page 14
                The student will use interest and recommendation SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                of others to select a variety of age and ability    253, 321, 389
                appropriate nonfiction materials (e.g., biographies
                and topical areas, such as science, music, art,
                history, sports, current events) to expand the core
                knowledge necessary to connect topics and
                function as a fully literate member of a shared
LA.6.2.2.5      culture.                                                                                           I   X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                    Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                    438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                                                                    preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                The student will identify information provided in   skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                text features (e.g., table of contents, headings,   T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.2.2.In.a   simple charts, maps);                                                                              I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Strategies: recognize sequence,
                The student will use information from nonfiction      101; identify main idea and details, 179;
                text to answer questions related to the main idea     analyze text structure, 267, 349; follow
LA.6.2.2.In.b   and supporting details;                               steps in process, 311                        I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57,
                                                                      62, 83, 97, 111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175,
                The student will organize information to show         187, 192, 213, 227, 239, 251, 256, 277,
                understanding (e.g., using simple graphic             279, 291, 307, 317, 319, 324, 345, 361,
LA.6.2.2.In.c   organizers);                                          375, 387, 392                                I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: math text, 22–25; social
                                                                       studies text, 34–39, 74–79, 154–157,
                The student will identify a variety of nonfiction text 204–209, 284–287, 336–341; science text,
                (e.g., reference materials, dictionaries,              116–117, 180–183, 244–247, 312–315,
LA.6.2.2.In.d   newspapers, magazines); and                            380–383                                     I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                The student will select a variety of nonfiction       253, 321, 389
                materials based on interest or recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.6.2.2.In.e   member of a shared culture.                                                                        I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                      Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                      438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                                                                      preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                The student will identify information included in     skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                text features (e.g., illustrations, title, table of   T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.2.2.Su.a   contents, headings);                                                                               I   X   X
                                                                   Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: math text,
                The student will use information from read-aloud 22–25; social studies text, 34–39, 74–79,
                nonfiction text to answer questions about the      154–157, 204–209, 284–287, 336–341;
                main idea and supporting details (e.g., who, what, science text, 116–117, 180–183, 244–247,
LA.6.2.2.Su.b   where, when);                                      312–315, 380–383                                I   X   X

                                                                         Grade 6                                                   Page 15
                                                                                SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57,
                                                                                62, 83, 97, 111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175,
                           The student will organize information to show        187, 192, 213, 227, 239, 251, 256, 277,
                           understanding (e.g., using simple graphic            279, 291, 307, 317, 319, 324, 345, 361,
LA.6.2.2.Su.c              organizers);                                         375, 387, 392                                 I   X   X
                                                                                  SE/TE: Genre: math text, 22–25; social
                                                                                  studies text, 34–39, 74–79, 154–157,
                           The student will identify a variety of nonfiction text 204–209, 284–287, 336–341; science text,
                           (e.g., easy-to-read reference materials,               116–117, 180–183, 244–247, 312–315,
LA.6.2.2.Su.d              dictionaries); and                                     380–383                                     I   X   X
                                                                                SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                           The student will select a variety of nonfiction      253, 321, 389
                           materials based on interest or recommendations
                           to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                           necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.6.2.2.Su.e              member of a shared culture.                                                                        I   X   X
                                                                                SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                                meet individual needs: Maps and
                                                                                Diagrams, 434–435; Graphs, 436–437;
                                                                                Graphic Organizers, 438; Strategies: use
                                                                                visuals, 21, 115; preview, 33; follow steps
                           The student will recognize pictures or symbols       in process, 311; skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map,
                           paired with words in informational text used to      T39, T91, T183, T223, T285, T369; Chart,
LA.6.2.2.Pa.a              guide classroom activities;                          T117, T181                                    I   X
                           The student will respond purposefully to pictures    SE/TE: Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                           or symbols paired with words used to guide           preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
LA.6.2.2.Pa.b              classroom activities;                                skim, 365                                     I   X
                           The student will recognize pictures, or symbols      SE/TE: Strategies: follow steps in process,
                           paired with words depicting a sequence in familiar   311; skim, 365
LA.6.2.2.Pa.c              activities; and                                                                                    I   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Further Reading, 59, 125, 189,
                           The student will select nonfiction materials based 253, 321, 389
                           on interest or recommendations to expand the
                           core foundation of knowledge necessary to
LA.6.2.2.Pa.d              function as a member of a shared culture.                                                          I   X
Grade 6: Writing Process
                           Standard: The student will use prewriting
                           strategies to generate ideas and formulate a
Pre-Writing                plan.
                           The student will prewrite by generating ideas from SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324,
                           multiple sources (e.g., prior knowledge,           392; The Writing Process, 442–445
                           discussion with others, writers notebook,
                           research materials, or other reliable sources),
                           based upon teacher-directed topics and personal
LA.6.3.1.1                 interests;                                                                                         I   X   X   X




                                                                                   Grade 6                                                    Page 16
                                                                       SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324,
                                                                       392; The Writing Process, 442–445;
                                                                       Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                The student will prewrite by making a plan for         111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213,
                writing that prioritizes ideas, addresses purpose,     227, 239, 251, 277, 279, 291, 307, 317,
LA.6.3.1.2      audience, main idea, and logical sequence; and         319, 345, 361, 375, 387                       I   X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Graphic Organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57,
                                                                       62, 83, 97, 111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175,
                The student will prewrite by using organizational      187, 192, 213, 227, 239, 251, 256, 277,
                strategies and tools (e.g., technology, outline,       279, 291, 307, 317, 319, 324, 345, 361,
LA.6.3.1.3      chart, table, graph, web, story map).                  375, 387, 392                                 I   X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324,
                                                                       392; The Writing Process, 442–445;
                The student will prewrite by generating ideas          Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                through a variety of activities (e.g. brainstorming,   111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213,
                graphic organizers, group discussions, printed         227, 239, 251, 277, 279, 291, 307, 317,
LA.6.3.1.In.a   materials);                                            319, 345, 361, 375, 387                       I   X   X
                The student will prewrite by identifying the         SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324,
                purpose (e.g., inform, tell a story, entertain) and  392; The Writing Process, 442–445;
LA.6.3.1.In.b   intended audience for writing; and                   Modes of Writing, 439-441                       I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Graphic Organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57,
                The student will prewrite by using graphic           62, 83, 97, 111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175,
                organizers, outlines, or charts to create a plan for 187, 192, 213, 227, 239, 251, 256, 277,
                writing that identifies the main idea and            279, 291, 307, 317, 319, 324, 345, 361,
LA.6.3.1.In.c   supporting details.                                  375, 387, 392                                   I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324,
                                                                     392; The Writing Process, 442–445;
                The student will prewrite by generating ideas        Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                through a variety of activities (e.g., responding to 111, 123, 128, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213,
                prompts, viewing pictures, listening to text, group 227, 239, 251, 277, 279, 291, 307, 317,
LA.6.3.1.Su.a   discussion);                                         319, 345, 361, 375, 387                         I   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324,
                The student will prewrite by identifying the       392; The Writing Process, 442–445;
LA.6.3.1.Su.b   purpose and intended audience for writing; and     Modes of Writing, 439-441                         I   X   X
                The student will prewrite by determining the main SE/TE: Main Idea and Details, 213, 227,
LA.6.3.1.Su.c   topic and details.                                 361                                               I   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324,
                                                                   392; The Writing Process, 442-445; Add’l
                The student will select a familiar person, object, TE: Differentiated Instruction, 63, 129, 193,
LA.6.3.1.Pa.a   activity, or event as the topic of communication.  257, 325, 393                                     I   X
                Standard: The student will write a draft
                appropriate to the topic, audience, and
Drafting        purpose.
                The student will draft writing by developing main SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324, 393;
                ideas from the prewriting plan using primary and The Writing Process, 442–445
                secondary sources appropriate to purpose and
LA.6.3.2.1      audience;                                                                                            I   X   X   X

                                                                          Grade 6                                                    Page 17
                                                                      SE/TE: Organization: cause and effect,
                The student will draft writing by organizing          251; classify, 291; chronological order, 57,
                information into a logical sequence and               123, 319; compare and contrast, 239;
                combining or deleting sentences to enhance            Draft, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324, 393; The
LA.6.3.2.2      clarity; and                                          Writing Process, 442–445                       I   X   X   X
                The student will draft writing by analyzing           Writing examples exist for all writing
                language techniques of professional authors           activities: SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 192, 256,
                (e.g., point of view, establishing mood) to           324, 393; The Writing Process, 442–445
                enhance the use of descriptive language and           Add’l TE: xx
LA.6.3.2.3      word choices.                                                                                        I   X   X   X
                The student will draft writing by using a prewriting SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324, 393;
                plan to develop the main idea and supporting         The Writing Process, 442–445
LA.6.3.2.In.a   details; and                                                                                         I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Organization: cause and effect,
                                                                     251; classify, 291; chronological order, 57,
                                                                     123, 319; compare and contrast, 239;
                The student will draft writing by organizing ideas Draft, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324, 393; The
LA.6.3.2.In.b   into a logical sequence.                             Writing Process, 442–445                        I   X   X
                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128,
                The student will draft writing by describing topics 192, 256, 324, 393; The Writing Process,
LA.6.3.2.Su.a   based on ideas developed in a plan; and              442–445                                         I   X   X
                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Organization:
                                                                     cause and effect, 251; classify, 291;
                                                                     chronological order, 57, 123, 319; compare
                                                                     and contrast, 239; Draft, 62, 128, 192, 256,
                The student will draft writing by organizing the     324, 393; The Writing Process, 442–445
LA.6.3.2.Su.b   ideas according to the purpose.                                                                      I   X   X
                The student will make an initial attempt to           SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 192, 256, 324, 393;
                communicate information about a familiar              The Writing Process, 442-445; Add’l TE:
                person, object, activity, or event using pictures,    Differentiated Instruction, 63, 129, 193,
LA.6.3.2.Pa.a   symbols, or words.                                    257, 325, 393                                  I   X

                Standard: The student will revise and refine
Revising        the draft for clarity and effectiveness.
                The student will revise by evaluating the draft for   SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 193, 257, 323,
                development of ideas and content, logical             393; The Writing Process, 442-445
                organization, voice, point of view, word choice,
LA.6.3.3.1      and sentence variation;                                                                              I   X   X   X
                The student will revise by creating clarity and    SE/TE: Writing Checklist, 63, 129, 193,
                logic by rearranging words, sentences, and         257, 323, 393
                paragraphs, adding transitional words,
                incorporating sources directly and indirectly into
                writing, using generalizations where appropriate,
                and connecting conclusion to ending (e.g., use of
LA.6.3.3.2      the circular ending);                                                                                I   X   X   X

                                                                         Grade 6                                                     Page 18
                The student will revise by creating precision and      SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 193, 257, 323,
                interest by expressing ideas vividly through           393; The Writing Process, 442-445
                multiple language techniques (e.g.,
                foreshadowing, imagery, simile, metaphor,
                sensory language, connotation, denotation) and
                modifying word choices using resources and
                reference materials (e.g., dictionary, thesaurus);
LA.6.3.3.3      and                                                                                                   I   X   X   X
                The student will revise by applying appropriate        SE/TE: Six Traits of Writing Checklist, 63,
                tools or strategies to evaluate and refine the draft   129, 193, 257, 323, 393
LA.6.3.3.4      (e.g., peer review, checklists, rubrics).                                                             I   X   X
                The student will revise by reviewing for clarity of    SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 193, 257, 323,
                content, organization, and word choice and use of      393; The Writing Process, 442-445
                simple and compound sentences to express
LA.6.3.3.In.a   ideas;                                                                                                I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 193, 257, 323,
                The student will revise by improving connections       393; The Writing Process, 442-445
                between main ideas and details and adding
LA.6.3.3.In.b   details needed to communicate the purpose;                                                            I   X   X
                The student will revise by changing words and          SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 193, 257, 323,
                adding transitional words to clarify meaning or        393; The Writing Process, 442-445
                add interest using resources and materials to
LA.6.3.3.In.c   select appropriate vocabulary; and                                                                    I   X   X
                The student will revise by using tools and             SE/TE: Writing Checklist, 63, 129, 193,
                strategies (e.g., checklists, teacher review, peer     257, 323, 393
LA.6.3.3.In.d   review) to improve the draft.                                                                         I   X   X
                                                                      Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                The student will revise by reviewing draft to clarify individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129,
                content and use of complete sentences to              193, 257, 323, 393; The Writing Process,
LA.6.3.3.Su.a   express ideas;                                        442-445                                         I   X   X
                                                                      Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                      individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129,
                The student will revise by improving the              193, 257, 323, 393; The Writing Process,
LA.6.3.3.Su.b   connection between main ideas and details;            442-445                                         I   X   X
                                                                      Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                      individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129,
                The student will revise by adding descriptive         193, 257, 323, 393; The Writing Process,
LA.6.3.3.Su.c   words or details; and                                 442-445                                         I   X   X
                The student will revise by using tools, strategies, Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                and resources to improve the draft (e.g., teacher individual needs: SE/TE: Writing
LA.6.3.3.Su.d   or peer review, dictionary).                          Checklist, 63, 129, 193, 257, 323, 393          I   X   X
                The student will adjust information communicated SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 193, 257, 323,
                about a familiar person, object, activity, or event 393; The Writing Process, 442-445; Add’l
                when necessary by selecting different pictures,       TE: Differentiated Instruction, 63, 129, 193,
LA.6.3.3.Pa.a   symbols, or words.                                    257, 325, 393                                   I   X




                                                                          Grade 6                                                     Page 19
Editing for Language   Standard: The student will edit and correct the
Conventions            draft for standard language conventions.
                       The student will edit for correct use of spelling,     SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                       using spelling rules, orthographic patterns,           258, 326, 396; Spelling lessons will aid
                       generalizations, knowledge of root words,              students with this skill, for examples see:
                       prefixes, suffixes, and knowledge of Greek and         73, 115, 217, 231, 267, 335
                       Latin root words and using a dictionary,
LA.6.3.4.1             thesaurus, or other resources as necessary;                                                          I   X   X   X
                                                                             SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                       The student will edit for correct use                 258, 326, 396; Grammar Handbook:
                       of capitalization, including major words in titles of Capitalization, 427-429
LA.6.3.4.2             books, plays, movies, and television programs;                                                       I   X   X   X
                                                                             SE/TE: Punctuation, 139, 374, 386; Edit
                       The student will edit for correct use of punctuation and Proofread, 64, 130, 194, 258, 326,
                       in simple, compound, and complex sentences,           396; Grammar Handbook, 422-427
                       including appositives and appositive phrases, and
                       in cited sources, including quotations for exact
LA.6.3.4.3             words from sources;                                                                                  I   X   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Grammar Focus, 16, 28, 42, 56,
                                                                              82, 96, 110, 122, 148, 160, 174, 186, 212,
                       The student will edit for correct use of the eight     226, 238, 250, 278, 290, 306, 318, 344,
                       parts of speech (noun, pronoun, verb, adverb,          360, 374, 386; Edit and Proofread, 64,
                       adjective, conjunction, preposition, interjection);    130, 194, 258, 326, 396; Grammar
LA.6.3.4.4             and                                                    Handbook, 412–419                             I   X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of consistency   SE/TE: Verb Tense, 122, 212, 226, 290;
                       in verb tense in simple, compound, and complex         Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194, 258,
LA.6.3.4.5             sentences.                                             326, 396; Grammar Handbook,415-416            I   X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of spelling of   SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                       high frequency and phonetically regular words,         258, 326, 396; Spelling lessons will aid
                       using a word bank, dictionary, or other resource       students with this skill, for examples see:
LA.6.3.4.In.a          as necessary;                                          73, 115, 217, 231, 267, 335                   I   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of               SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                       capitalization, including but not limited to proper    258, 326, 396; Grammar Handbook:
                       nouns, the pronoun “I,” and the initial word of        Capitalization, 427-429
LA.6.3.4.In.b          sentences;                                                                                           I   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of end           SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                       punctuation (period, question mark, exclamation        258, 326, 396; Grammar Handbook, 421,
LA.6.3.4.In.c          point) for sentences;                                  422                                           I   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of singular      Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194, 258,
LA.6.3.4.In.d          and plural nouns; and                                  326, 396; Grammar Handbook, 412-413           I   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Verb Tense, 122, 212, 226, 290;
                       The student will edit for correct use of verb tense Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194, 258,
LA.6.3.4.In.e          and complete sentences.                                326, 396; Grammar Handbook,415-416            I   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of left to right SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
LA.6.3.4.Su.a          progression and sequencing;                            258, 326, 396                                 I   X   X



                                                                                 Grade 6                                                    Page 20
                                                                     SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                The student will edit for correct use of spelling of 258, 326, 396; Spelling lessons will aid
                words, using a word bank, dictionary, or other       students with this skill, for examples see:
LA.6.3.4.Su.b   resource as necessary;                               73, 115, 217, 231, 267, 335                     I   X   X
                The student will edit for correct use of             SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                capitalization of proper names; the pronoun “I,”     258, 326, 396; Grammar Handbook:
LA.6.3.4.Su.c   and the initial word of sentences;                   Capitalization, 427-429                         I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 194,
                The student will edit for correct use of end         258, 326, 396; Grammar Handbook, 421,
LA.6.3.4.Su.d   punctuation (period) in complete sentences; and 422                                                  I   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Sentences, 148; Edit and
                The student will edit for correct use of complete    Proofread, 64, 130, 194, 258, 326, 396;
LA.6.3.4.Su.e   sentences.                                           Grammar Handbook, 420-421                       I   X   X
                The student will adjust information communicated For related material see: SE/TE: Edit and
                about a familiar person, object, activity, or event Proofread, 64, 130, 194, 258, 326, 396
                when necessary by selecting different pictures,
LA.6.3.4.Pa.a   symbols, or words.                                                                                   I   X
                Standard: The student will write a final
Publishing      product for the intended audience.
                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
                The student will prepare writing using technology 397; The Writing Process, 442-445;
                in a format appropriate to audience and purpose Formal E-mail, 279; How to Use
LA.6.3.5.1      (e.g., manuscript, multimedia);                      Technology in Writing, 461                      I   X   X   X
                                                                     For related information see: SE/TE: How-
                                                                     to instructions, 319; Friendly Letter, 83;
                The student will use elements of spacing and         Quotations, 375, 387; Publish, 65, 131,
                design for graphics (e.g., tables, drawings, charts, 195, 259, 327, 397; The Writing Process,
                graphs) when applicable to enhance the               442-445; Writing Letters, 449-450
LA.6.3.5.2      appearance of the document; and                                                                      I   X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
                                                                       397; The Writing Process, 442-445;
                                                                       Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                                                                       111, 123, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213, 227,
                The student will share the writing with the            239, 251, 279, 291, 307, 319, 345, 361,
LA.6.3.5.3      intended audience.                                     375, 387                                      I   X   X   X
                The student will prepare writing in a format      SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
LA.6.3.5.In.a   appropriate to audience and purpose;              397; The Writing Process, 442-445                  I   X   X
                                                                  For related information see: SE/TE: How-
                                                                  to instructions, 319; Friendly Letter, 83;
                                                                  Quotations, 375, 387; Publish, 65, 131,
                The student will use required spacing and         195, 259, 327, 397; The Writing Process,
                margins and graphics and illustrations as needed; 442-445; Writing Letters, 449-450
LA.6.3.5.In.b   and                                                                                                  I   X   X




                                                                          Grade 6                                                    Page 21
                                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
                                                                                     397; The Writing Process, 442-445;
                                                                                     Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                                                                                     111, 123, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213, 227,
                                The student will share writing with the intended     239, 251, 279, 291, 307, 319, 345, 361,
LA.6.3.5.In.c                   audience.                                            375, 387                                       I   X   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
                                The student will prepare writing in a format         397; The Writing Process, 442-445;
LA.6.3.5.Su.a                   appropriate to audience and purpose;                 Writing Letters, 449-450                       I   X   X
                                                                                     For related information see: SE/TE: How-
                                                                                     to instructions, 319; Friendly Letter, 83;
                                                                                     Quotations, 375, 387; Publish, 65, 131,
                                                                                     195, 259, 327, 397; The Writing Process,
                                The student will use spacing and margins as          442-445; Writing Letters, 449-450
LA.6.3.5.Su.b                   required in the final product; and                                                                  I   X   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
                                                                                     397; The Writing Process, 442-445;
                                                                                     Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                                                                                     111, 123, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213, 227,
                                The student will share writing with the intended     239, 251, 279, 291, 307, 319, 345, 361,
LA.6.3.5.Su.c                   audience.                                            375, 387                                       I   X   X
                                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Writing Activities,
                                The student will effectively communicate             17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97, 111, 123, 149, 161,
                                information about a familiar person, object,         175, 187, 213, 227, 239, 251, 279, 291,
                                activity, or event using pictures, symbols, or       307, 319, 345, 361, 375, 387
LA.6.3.5.Pa.a                   words.                                                                                              I   X
Grade 6: Writing Applications
                                Standard: The student develops and
Creative                        demonstrates creative writing.
                                The student will write narrative accounts with an    SE/TE: Narrative Writing, 83, 97, 111, 123,
                                engaging plot (including rising action, conflict,    128–131, 237; Descriptive Writing, 17, 29,
                                climax, falling action, and resolution) include a    43, 57, 62–65
                                clearly described setting with figurative language
                                and descriptive words or phrases to enhance
LA.6.4.1.1                      style and tone; and                                                                                 I   X   X   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Writing Poetry, 225; Writing
                                The student will write a variety of expressive       Fables, 237; Writing Travel Brochures, 95;
                                forms (e.g., short play, song lyrics, historical     Writing Journal Entries, 109, 147, 277;
                                fiction, limericks) that employ figurative language, Diary Entry, 175; see also: poetry,
                                rhythm, dialogue, characterization, and/or           218–221, 222, 223, 350–353; play,
LA.6.4.1.2                      appropriate format.                                  268–275                                        I   X   X   X
                                The student will write narratives about events that SE/TE: Narrative Writing, 83, 97, 111, 123,
                                include a main idea, descriptive details,           128–131, 237; Descriptive Writing, 17, 29,
                                characters, a sequence of events, and setting;      43, 57, 62–65
LA.6.4.1.In.a                   and                                                                                                 I   X   X



                                                                                        Grade 6                                                     Page 22
                                                                     SE/TE: Writing Poetry, 225; Writing
                The student will write expressive forms (e.g.,       Journal Entries, 109, 147, 277; Diary Entry,
                poems, skits) that include rhythm and rhyme,         175; see also: poetry, 218–221, 222, 223,
LA.6.4.1.In.b   dialogue, and appropriate format.                    350–353; play, 268–275                         I   X   X
                The student will write narratives about persons,     SE/TE: Narrative Writing, 83, 97, 111, 123,
                objects, and events that include a main idea and     128–131, 237
                characters by creating stories supported by
LA.6.4.1.Su.a   pictures; and                                                                                       I   X   X
                                                                     Teachers can adapt the following to meet
                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Poetry, 218–221,
                The student will contribute to group writing of      222, 223, 350–353; Play, 268–275
LA.6.4.1.Su.b   poetry, rhymes, or skits.                                                                           I   X   X
                The student will communicate information that        SE/TE: Narrative Writing, 83, 97, 111, 123,
                tells about familiar persons, objects, and events;   128–131, 237; Descriptive Writing, 17, 29,
LA.6.4.1.Pa.a   and                                                  43, 57, 62–65                                  I   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Writing Poetry, 225; Writing
                The student will recognize rhythm, sounds, and       Fables, 237; Poetry, 218–221, 222, 223,
LA.6.4.1.Pa.b   words in familiar poetry, songs, and rhymes.         350–353                                        I   X

                Standard: The student develops and
                demonstrates technical writing that provides
Informative     information related to real-world tasks.
                                                                     SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause-and-
                The student will write in a variety of               Effect, 251; Essay, 256–259, 324–327;
                informational/expository forms (e.g., summaries,     Formal E-mail, 279; How-to Instructions,
                procedures, instructions, experiments, rubrics,      319; Newspaper Article, 213; Response to
LA.6.4.2.1      how-to manuals, assembly instructions);              Literature, 227; Plot Summary, 307             I   X   X   X
                                                                     For related material see: SE/TE: How to
                                                                     Use Graphic Organizers, 438; Graphic
                The student will record information (e.g.,           Organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57, 62, 83, 97, 111,
                observations, notes, lists, charts, legends) related 123, 128, 149, 161, 175, 187, 192, 213,
                to a topic, including visual aids to organize and    227, 239, 251, 256, 277, 279, 291, 307,
                record information and include a list of sources     317, 319, 324, 345, 361, 375, 387, 392
LA.6.4.2.2      used;                                                                                               I   X   X   X
                The student will write informational/expository      SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause-and-
                essays (e.g., process, description, explanation,     Effect, 251; Essay, 256–259, 324–327;
                comparison/contrast, problem/solution) that          Formal E-mail, 279; How-to Instructions,
                include a thesis statement, supporting details,      319; Newspaper Article, 213; Response to
                and introductory, body, and concluding               Literature, 227; Plot Summary, 307
LA.6.4.2.3      paragraphs;                                                                                         I   X   X   X




                                                                        Grade 6                                                     Page 23
                                                                      SE/TE: Writing E-mail, 359; Friendly Letter,
                The student will write a variety of informal          83; Writing Letters, 449-450
                communications (e.g., friendly letters, thank-you
                notes, messages) and formal communications
                (e.g., conventional business letters, invitations)
                that follow a format and that have a clearly stated
                purpose and that include the date, proper
LA.6.4.2.4      salutation, body, closing and signature; and                                                         I   X   X   X
                The student will write directions to unfamiliar       For related informatoin see: SE/TE: How-
                locations using cardinal and ordinal directions,      to Instructions, 319; Add’l TE: Map, T39,
                landmarks, and distances, and create an               T91, T183, T223, T285, T369
LA.6.4.2.5      accompanying map.                                                                                    I   X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause-and-
                                                                      Effect, 251; Essay, 256–259, 324–327;
                                                                      Formal E-mail, 279; How-to Instructions,
                                                                      319; Newspaper Article, 213; Response to
                The student will write in a variety of expository     Literature, 227; Plot Summary, 307; Writing
LA.6.4.2.In.a   forms (e.g., journal, log, newsletter article);       Journal Entries, 109, 147, 277                 I   X   X
                                                                      For related material see: SE/TE: How to
                                                                      Use Graphic Organizers, 438; Graphic
                                                                      Organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57, 62, 83, 97, 111,
                                                                      123, 128, 149, 161, 175, 187, 192, 213,
                The student will record information (e.g.,            227, 239, 251, 256, 277, 279, 291, 307,
                observations, notes, lists, labels, charts) related   317, 319, 324, 345, 361, 375, 387, 392
LA.6.4.2.In.b   to a topic;                                                                                          I   X   X
                The student will write an expository paragraph        SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause-and-
                that includes a topic sentence and relevant           Effect, 251; Essay, 256–259, 324–327
LA.6.4.2.In.c   information;                                                                                         I   X   X
                The student will compose a friendly letter,           SE/TE: Writing E-mail, 359; Friendly Letter,
                invitation, message, thank-you note, and a formal     83; Writing Letters, 449-450
LA.6.4.2.In.d   letter using a model; and                                                                            I   X   X
                The student will write functional text (e.g., two-    SE/TE: Formal E-mail, 279; How-to
                step instructions, directions, recipes, labels,       Instructions, 319
LA.6.4.2.In.e   graphs).                                                                                             I   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Formal E-mail, 279; How-to
                                                                      Instructions, 319; Newspaper Article, 213;
                                                                      Response to Literature, 227; Plot
                The student will write in an expository form (e.g.,   Summary, 307; Writing Journal Entries,
LA.6.4.2.Su.a   daily journal, log);                                  109, 147, 277                                  I   X   X
                                                                      For related material see: SE/TE: How to
                                                                      Use Graphic Organizers, 438; Graphic
                                                                      Organizers, 17, 29, 43, 57, 62, 83, 97, 111,
                                                                      123, 128, 149, 161, 175, 187, 192, 213,
                                                                      227, 239, 251, 256, 277, 279, 291, 307,
                The student will record information (e.g., lists,     317, 319, 324, 345, 361, 375, 387, 392
LA.6.4.2.Su.b   labels, observations, charts) related to a topic;                                                    I   X   X



                                                                         Grade 6                                                     Page 24
                                                                     For related material see: SE/TE:
                                                                     Expository Writing: Cause-and-Effect, 251;
                The student will write expository text, with         Essay, 256–259, 324–327; Formal E-mail,
                illustrations or graphics, that includes information 279; How-to Instructions, 319; How to Use
LA.6.4.2.Su.c   about the topic;                                     Graphic Organizers, 438                         I   X   X
                                                                    For related material see: SE/TE: Writing E-
                The student will compose invitations, messages, mail, 359; Friendly Letter, 83; Writing
LA.6.4.2.Su.d   and thank-you notes using a model; and              Letters, 449-450                                 I   X   X
                The student will produce functional text supported SE/TE: Formal E-mail, 279; How-to
                by pictures (e.g., two-step directions, information Instructions, 319
LA.6.4.2.Su.e   signs, basic recipes).                                                                               I   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Extension and Response to
                                                                    Literature, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81, 95, 109, 121,
                The student will communicate information about 147, 159, 173, 185, 211, 225, 237, 249,
                persons or objects using pictures, symbols, or      277, 289, 305, 317, 343, 359, 373, 385
LA.6.4.2.Pa.a   words;                                                                                               I   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Extension and Response to
                                                                    Literature, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81, 95, 109, 121,
                                                                    147, 159, 173, 185, 211, 225, 237, 249,
                                                                    277, 289, 305, 317, 343, 359, 373, 385;
                The student will communicate information about Oral Report, 189, 253, 389; Oral Book
LA.6.4.2.Pa.b   classroom activities;                               Report, 389                                      I   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Discussion, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81, 95,
                The student will use gestures and expressions to 109, 121, 147, 159, 173, 185, 211, 225,
                greet or invite others to engage in an activity or 237, 249, 277, 289, 305, 317, 343, 359,
LA.6.4.2.Pa.c   express appreciation; and                          373, 385; Skit, 59, 253, 389                      I   X
                                                                   For related material see: SE/TE: In Your
                The student will express preferences and           Own Words, 26, 41, 80, 120, 158, 184,
LA.6.4.2.Pa.d   choices.                                           210, 248, 288, 316, 342                           I

                Standard: The student develops and
                demonstrates persuasive writing that is used
Persuasive      for the purpose of influencing the reader.
                The student will write persuasive text (e.g.,          SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: Book Review,
                advertisement, speech, essay, public service           149; Critical Evaluation, 187; Diary Entry,
                announcement) that establishes and develops a          175; Question-and-Answer Format, 161;
                controlling idea, using appropriate supporting         Speech, 192–195
LA.6.4.3.1      arguments and detailed evidence;and                                                                  I   X   X   X
                The student will include persuasive techniques         SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: Speech,
                (e.g., word choice, repetition, emotional appeal,      192–195; Evaluating Issues, 187
                hyperbole, appeal to authority, celebrity
LA.6.4.3.2      endorsement).                                                                                        I   X   X   X
                The student will select a favorite topic or activity   SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: Book Review,
                and write persuasive text (e.g., advertisement,        149; Critical Evaluation, 187; Diary Entry,
                poster, message) that shows why the topic or           175; Speech, 192–195
LA.6.4.3.In.a   activity is important.                                                                               I   X   X



                                                                          Grade 6                                                    Page 25
                                                                               SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: Book Review,
                         The student will describe a favorite topic and list   149; Critical Evaluation, 187; Diary Entry,
LA.6.4.3.Su.a            reasons why that topic is the favorite.               175; Speech, 192–195                            I   X   X
                                                                               Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                         The student will communicate preferences or           individual needs: SE/TE: Persuasive
                         feelings about familiar persons, objects, or          Writing: Book Review, 149; Speech,
LA.6.4.3.Pa.a            actions in a variety of daily activities.             192–195                                         I   X
Grade 6: Communication
                         Standard: The student engages in the writing
                         process and writes to communicate ideas and
Penmanship               experiences.
                                                                             Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                             provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                             Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                                                                             111, 123, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213, 227,
                         The student will use fluent and legible handwriting 239, 251, 279, 291, 307, 319, 345, 361,
LA.6.5.1.1               skills.                                             375, 387                                          I   X   X   X
                                                                               Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                               provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                               Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                                                                               111, 123, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213, 227,
                                                                               239, 251, 279, 291, 307, 319, 345, 361,
LA.6.5.1.In.a            The student will use legible handwriting.             375, 387                                        I   X   X
                                                                               Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                               provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                               Writing Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97,
                         The student will write words using upper case         111, 123, 149, 161, 175, 187, 213, 227,
                         and lower case letters, proper spacing, and           239, 251, 279, 291, 307, 319, 345, 361,
LA.6.5.1.Su.a            sequencing.                                           375, 387                                        I   X   X
                                                                               For related material see: SE/TE: Writing
                                                                               Activities, 17, 29, 43, 57, 83, 97, 111, 123,
                                                                               149, 161, 175, 187, 213, 227, 239, 251,
                         The student will use pictures, symbols, or words      279, 291, 307, 319, 345, 361, 375, 387
LA.6.5.1.Pa.a            to communicate meaning.                                                                               I   X
                         Standard: The student effectively applies
Listening and Speaking   listening and speaking strategies.




                                                                                  Grade 6                                                      Page 26
                                                                       SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                       60–61, 126–127, 190–191, 254–255,
                                                                       322–323, 390–391; In Your Own Words,
                                                                       26, 41, 80, 120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288,
                                                                       316, 342; Discussion, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81,
                                                                       95, 109, 121, 147, 159, 173, 185, 211,
                                                                       225, 237, 249, 277, 289, 305, 317, 343,
                                                                       359, 373, 385; Add’l TE: Listen and Read,
                                                                       T22, T48, T74, T88, T102, T116, T140,
                The student will listen and gain information for a
                                                                       T154, T166, T180, T232, T244, T268,
                variety of purposes, (e.g., clarifying, elaborating,
                                                                       T284, T296, T336, T350, T366
                summarizing main ideas and supporting details);
LA.6.5.2.1      and                                                                                                I   X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                The student will deliver narrative and informative     60–61, 126–127, 190–191, 254–255,
                presentations, including oral responses to             322–323, 390–391; In Your Own Words,
                literature, and adjust oral language, body             26, 41, 80, 120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288,
                language, eye contact, gestures, technology and        316, 342
LA.6.5.2.2      supporting graphics appropriate to the situation.                                                  I   X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                       60–61, 126–127, 190–191, 254–255,
                                                                       322–323, 390–391; In Your Own Words,
                The student will listen and gain information for a     26, 41, 80, 120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288,
                variety of purposes including but not limited to       316, 342; Discussion, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81,
                identifying main idea, supporting details (e.g.,       95, 109, 121, 147, 159, 173, 185, 211,
                who, what, where, when, how, why), and                 225, 237, 249, 277, 289, 305, 317, 343,
LA.6.5.2.In.a   sequence of events; and                                359, 373, 385                               I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                       60–61, 126–127, 190–191, 254–255,
                The student will give oral presentations about         322–323, 390–391; In Your Own Words,
                topics using appropriate language choices, body        26, 41, 80, 120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288,
LA.6.5.2.In.b   language, and eye contact.                             316, 342                                    I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                       60–61, 126–127, 190–191, 254–255,
                                                                       322–323, 390–391; In Your Own Words,
                The student will listen and gain information for a     26, 41, 80, 120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288,
                variety of purposes including but not limited to       316, 342; Discussion, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81,
                determining main idea, supporting details (e.g.,       95, 109, 121, 147, 159, 173, 185, 211,
                who, what, where, and when), and sequence of           225, 237, 249, 277, 289, 305, 317, 343,
LA.6.5.2.Su.a   events; and                                            359, 373, 385                               I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                The student will give informal oral presentations      60–61, 126–127, 190–191, 254–255,
                to retell stories or personal experiences using        322–323, 390–391; In Your Own Words,
                appropriate language choices and body                  26, 41, 80, 120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288,
LA.6.5.2.Su.b   language.                                              316, 342                                    I   X   X




                                                                          Grade 6                                                  Page 27
                                                                                     Add’l TE: Listen and Read, T22, T48, T74,
                              The student will listen and gain information for       T88, T102, T116, T140, T154, T166, T180,
                              different purposes (e.g., instruction in daily tasks); T232, T244, T268, T284, T296, T336,
LA.6.5.2.Pa.a                 and                                                    T350, T366                                   I   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Discussion, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81, 95,
                                                                                     109, 121, 147, 159, 173, 185, 211, 225,
                                                                                     237, 249, 277, 289, 305, 317, 343, 359,
                                                                                     373, 385; In Your Own Words, 26, 41, 80,
                              The student will use language to communicate           120, 158, 184, 210, 248, 288, 316, 342
LA.6.5.2.Pa.b                information in classroom activities.                                                                 I   X
Grade 6: Information and Media Literacy
                             Standard: The student comprehends the wide
                             array of informational text that is part of our
Informational Text           day to day experiences.
                                                                                  SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                                  Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                                                                                  438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                              The student will explain how text features (e.g.,   preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
                              charts, maps, diagrams, sub-headings, captions,     skim, 365; Add’l TE: Map, T39, T91, T183,
                              illustrations, graphs) aid the reader's             T223, T285, T369; Chart, T117, T181
LA.6.6.1.1                    understanding;                                                                                      I   X   X   X
                                                                                  SE/TE: Science text, 22–25, 116–117,
                                                                                  180–183, 244–247, 312–315, 380–383;
                              use information from a variety of consumer (e.g.,   Social Studies text, 34–39, 74–79,
                              warranties, instructional manuals), workplace       154–157, 204–209, 284–287, 336–341;
                              (e.g., applications, contracts) and other           Filling in Forms, 451, 452; Add’l TE:
                              documents to explain a situation and justify a      Almanac, T169; Atlas, T157, T341, T343;
LA.6.6.1.2                    decision; and                                       Reference Books, T205, T247                     I   X   X   X
                                                                                   SE/TE: How-to Demonstration, 322–323;
                                                                                   How-to instructions, 319; Problem-and-
LA.6.6.1.3                    create a technical manual or solve a problem.        Solution essay, 324–327                        I   X   X   X
                                                                                   SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                                   Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                              The student will locate information in text features 438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                              (e.g., table of contents, headings, simple charts    preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
LA.6.6.1.In.a                 and maps, text styles, glossary); and                skim, 365                                      I   X   X
                                                                                   SE/TE: Science text, 22–25, 116–117,
                                                                                   180–183, 244–247, 312–315, 380–383;
                                                                                   Social Studies text, 34–39, 74–79,
                              The student will use sources of information (e.g., 154–157, 204–209, 284–287, 336–341;
                              consumer, workplace, other real-world situations) Filling in Forms, 451, 452; Add’l TE:
                              to follow instructions and procedures, solve         Almanac, T169; Atlas, T157, T341, T343;
LA.6.6.1.In.b                 problems, and make decisions.                        Reference Books, T205, T247                    I   X   X




                                                                                      Grade 6                                                     Page 28
                                                                            SE/TE: Maps and Diagrams, 434–435;
                                                                            Graphs, 436–437; Graphic Organizers,
                   The student will identify information in text            438; Strategies: use visuals, 21, 115;
                   features (e.g., illustrations, title, table of contents, preview, 33; follow steps in process, 311;
LA.6.6.1.Su.a      headings); and                                           skim, 365                                    I   X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Science text, 22–25, 116–117,
                                                                         180–183, 244–247, 312–315, 380–383;
                                                                         Social Studies text, 34–39, 74–79,
                   The student will use easy-to-read informational       154–157, 204–209, 284–287, 336–341;
                   materials (e.g., consumer, workplace, other real-     Filling in Forms, 451, 452; Add’l TE:
                   world situations) with graphics to follow             Almanac, T169; Atlas, T157, T341, T343;
LA.6.6.1.Su.b      instructions, solve problems, and perform tasks.      Reference Books, T205, T247                     I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Extension and Response to
                                                                       Literature, 15, 27, 41, 55, 81, 95, 109, 121,
                   The student will use familiar pictures, symbols, or 147, 159, 173, 185, 211, 225, 237, 249,
                   words to complete tasks in classrooms or school 277, 289, 305, 317, 343, 359, 373, 385
LA.6.6.1.Pa.a      activites.                                                                                            I   X
                   Standard: The student uses a systematic
                   process for the collection, processing, and
Research Process   presentation of information.
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Writing, 345, 361, 375,
                                                                       387; Report, 392–397; Conducting
                                                                       Research, 453; How to Use the Internet for
                                                                       Research, 458; How to Evaluate the
                                                                       Quality of Information, 459; Research
                                                                       Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159, 185, 211,
                                                                       249, 289, 317, 385; Add’l TE: Internet,
                                                                       T13, T53, T89, T93, T107, T141, T171,
                   The student will select a topic for inquiry,
                                                                       T207, T221, T245, T271, T287, T303,
                   formulate a search plan, and apply evaluative
                                                                       T337, T355, T357; Almanac, T169; Atlas,
                   criteria (e.g., relevance, accuracy, organization,
                                                                       T157, T341, T343; Reference Books,
                   validity, currentness) to select and use
                                                                       T205, T247
LA.6.6.2.1         appropriate resources;                                                                                I   X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Conducting Research, 453; How to
                                                                       Use the Internet for Research, 458; How to
                                                                       Evaluate the Quality of Information, 459;
                                                                       Research Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
                                                                       185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385; Add’l TE:
                                                                       Internet, T13, T53, T89, T93, T107, T141,
                   The student will collect, evaluate and summarize
                                                                       T171, T207, T221, T245, T271, T287,
                   information using a variety of techniques from
                                                                       T303, T337, T355, T357; Almanac, T169;
                   multiple sources (e.g., encyclopedias, websites,
                                                                       Atlas, T157, T341, T343; Reference
                   experts) that includes paraphrasing to convey
                                                                       Books, T205, T247
                   ideas and details from the source, main idea(s)
LA.6.6.2.2         and relevant details;                                                                                 I   X   X   X




                                                                             Grade 6                                                     Page 29
                                                                    SE/TE: Research Writing, 345, 361, 375,
                The student will write an informational report that 387; Report, 392–397
                includes a focused topic, appropriate facts and
                relevant details, a logical sequence, a concluding
LA.6.6.2.3      statement, and list of sources used; and                                                            I   X   X   X
                The student will explain and demonstrate an         SE/TE: Paraphrases and Quotations, 375,
                understanding of the importance of ethical          387; Report, 392–397; Citing Sources, 455-
                research practices, including the need to avoid     456
                plagiarism, and know the associated
LA.6.6.2.4      consequences.                                                                                       I   X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Research Writing, 345, 361, 375,
                                                                    387; Report, 392–397; Conducting
                                                                    Research, 453; How to Use the Internet for
                The student will select a topic for inquiry and use Research, 458; How to Evaluate the
                a predetermined search plan to select reference Quality of Information, 459; Research
                materials (e.g., nonfiction books, dictionaries,    Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159, 185, 211,
LA.6.6.2.In.a   digital references, software);                      249, 289, 317, 385                              I   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Conducting Research, 453; How to
                                                                    Use the Internet for Research, 458; How to
                                                                    Evaluate the Quality of Information, 459;
                                                                    Research Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
                The student will identify information from          185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385
LA.6.6.2.In.b   references to answer search questions;                                                              I   X   X
                The student will write a report that includes a title, SE/TE: Research Writing, 345, 361, 375,
                main idea(s) and relevant details in an organized 387; Report, 392–397
                sequence with a closing statement, and a list of
LA.6.6.2.In.c   sources used; and                                                                                   I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Paraphrases and Quotations, 375,
                The student will record simple bibliographic data 387; Report, 392–397; Citing Sources, 455-
                and identify ethical practices for using information 456
LA.6.6.2.In.d   (e.g., not claiming ownership of others’ ideas).                                                    I   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Writing, 345, 361, 375,
                                                                       387; Report, 392–397; Conducting
                                                                       Research, 453; How to Use the Internet for
                The student will ask questions for a search on a Research, 458; How to Evaluate the
                topic and locate information in teacher-               Quality of Information, 459; Research
                recommended digital or print references or other Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159, 185, 211,
LA.6.6.2.Su.a   sources;                                               249, 289, 317, 385                           I   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Conducting Research, 453; How to
                                                                    Use the Internet for Research, 458; How to
                                                                    Evaluate the Quality of Information, 459;
                The student will use information from teacher-      Research Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
                recommended references or other sources to          185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385
LA.6.6.2.Su.b   answer search questions;                                                                            I   X   X
                The student will write a simple report that includes SE/TE: Research Writing, 345, 361, 375,
                a title, relevant details, illustrations or graphics, 387; Report, 392–397
LA.6.6.2.Su.c   and a list of sources used: and                                                                     I   X   X

                                                                       Grade 6                                                      Page 30
                                                                         SE/TE: Paraphrases and Quotations, 375,
                 The student will identify the titles of references or   387; Report, 392–397; Citing Sources, 455-
LA.6.6.2.Su.d    other sources used to answer search questions.          456                                            I   X   X
                 The student will select an object to explore and        For related material see: SE/TE:
                 use a teacher-recommended source for                    Research Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
LA.6.6.2.Pa.a    information;                                            185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385                   I   X
                 The student will select pictures, symbols, or           For related material see: SE/TE:
                 words that relate to the selected object or picture     Research Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
                 and seek assistance to clarify meaning of               185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385
LA.6.6.2.Pa.b    pictures, symbols, or words;                                                                           I   X
                 The student will communicate information about          For related material see: SE/TE:
                 the selected object or picture using pictures,          Research Activities, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
LA.6.6.2.Pa.c    symbols, or words; and                                  185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385                   I   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                         meet individual needs: Paraphrases and
                 The student will identify objects, books, and print     Quotations, 375, 387; Report, 392–397;
LA.6.6.2.Pa.d    material that belong to others.                         Citing Sources, 455-456                        I   X
                 Standard: The student develops and
                 demonstrates an understanding of media
                 literacy as a life skill that is integral to
Media Literacy   informed decision making.
                                                                         SE/TE: Use Visuals, 21, 115; Art Text,
                                                                         284–287; Viewing and Representing, 434-
                                                                         438; How to Evaluate the Quality of
                                                                         Information, 459; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy,
                 The student will analyze ways that production           T66, T68, T132, T134, T196, T198, T260,
                 elements (e.g., graphics, color, motion, sound,         T262, T328, T330, T398. A Video
                 digital technology) affect communication across         Program DVD features background
LA.6.6.3.1       the media; and                                          information about the theme.                   I   X   X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 434-
                                                                         438; How to Evaluate the Quality of
                 The student will demonstrate the ability to select      Information, 459; Visuals when Speaking,
                 and ethically use media appropriate for the             120, 210; Poster, 321; Artwork, 321, 389
LA.6.6.3.2       purpose, occasion, and audience.                                                                       I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Use Visuals, 21, 115; Art Text,
                                                                   284–287; Viewing and Representing, 434-
                                                                   438; How to Evaluate the Quality of
                                                                   Information, 459; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy,
                                                                   T66, T68, T132, T134, T196, T198, T260,
                 The student will identify how production elements T262, T328, T330, T398. A Video
                 (e.g., graphics, color, sound) enhance            Program DVD features background
LA.6.6.3.In.a    communication in media; and                       information about the theme.                         I   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 434-
                                                                   438; How to Evaluate the Quality of
                                                                   Information, 459; Visuals when Speaking,
                 The student will select media to enhance          120, 210; Poster, 321; Artwork, 321, 389
LA.6.6.3.In.b    communication.                                                                                         I   X   X

                                                                            Grade 6                                                     Page 31
                                                                        SE/TE: Use Visuals, 21, 115; Art Text,
                                                                        284–287; Viewing and Representing, 434-
                                                                        438; How to Evaluate the Quality of
                                                                        Information, 459; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy,
                The student will recognize production elements          T66, T68, T132, T134, T196, T198, T260,
LA.6.6.3.Su.a   (e.g., color, sound, motion) used in media; and         T262, T328, T330, T398                         I   X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                        meet individual needs: Poster, 321;
                                                                        Artwork, 321, 389. A Video Program DVD
                The student will use teacher-recommended                features background information about the
LA.6.6.3.Su.b   media to communicate information.                       theme.                                         I   X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                        meet individual needs: Use Visuals, 21,
                                                                        115; Art Text, 284–287; Viewing and
                The student will respond to production elements         Representing, 434-438; How to Evaluate
LA.6.6.3.Pa.a   (e.g., motion, sound, color) used in media.             the Quality of Information, 459                I   X
                Standard: The student develops the essential
                technology skills for using and understanding
                conventional and current tools, materials and
Technology      processes.
                                                                        SE/TE: Internet Use, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
                                                                        185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385; Formal E-
                                                                        mail, 279; Technology Handbook, 457-461;
                                                                        Add’l TE: Study Skills: Internet, T13, T53,
                                                                        T89, T93, T107, T141, T171, T207, T221,
                                                                        T245, T271, T287, T303, T337, T355,
                The student will use appropriate available              T357; A Video Program DVD features
                technologies to enhance communication and               background information about the theme.
LA.6.6.4.1      achieve a purpose (e.g., video, online); and                                                           I   X   X   X
                The student will determine and apply digital tools SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
                (e.g., word processing, multimedia authoring, web 397; Technology Handbook, 457-461
                tools, graphic organizers) to publications and
LA.6.6.4.2      presentations.                                                                                         I   X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Internet Use, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
                                                                   185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385; Formal E-
                                                                   mail, 279; Technology Handbook, 457-461;
                                                                   Add’l TE: Study Skills: Internet, T13, T53,
                                                                   T89, T93, T107, T141, T171, T207, T221,
                The student will use appropriate available         T245, T271, T287, T303, T337, T355,
LA.6.6.4.In.a   technologies to enhance communication; and         T357                                                I   X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
                The student will use digital tools for publishing or    397; Technology Handbook, 457-461
LA.6.6.4.In.b   presenting a topic or story with text and graphics.                                                    I   X   X
                The student will use an appropriate available           SE/TE: Internet Use, 27, 41, 81, 121, 159,
LA.6.6.4.Su.a   technology to enhance communication; and                185, 211, 249, 289, 317, 385                   I   X   X
                The student will use digital tools to present a topic   SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 195, 259, 327,
LA.6.6.4.Su.b   or story.                                               397; Technology Handbook, 457-461              I   X   X

                                                                           Grade 6                                                     Page 32
                                                                Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                individual needs: SE/TE: Internet Use, 27,
                The student will use an appropriate available   41, 81, 121, 159, 185, 211, 249, 289, 317,
LA.6.6.4.Pa.a   technology to enhance communication; and        385                                          I   X
                                                                Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                individual needs: SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131,
                The student will use a technology tool to       195, 259, 327, 397; Technology
LA.6.6.4.Pa.b   communicate information.                        Handbook, 457-461                            I   X




                                                                   Grade 6                                           Page 33
                                                       FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION
                                                     INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS CORRELATION
                                                          SUNSHINE STATE STANDARDS


              SUBJECT:     English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL)
           CATEGORY:       M/J Language Arts 1, 2, 3 through ESOL
                                                                          *Use I for Indepth and M for Mentioned.
CATEGORY CODE NUMBER:      ESOLMJS
      SUBMISSION TITLE:    Longman Keystone (A-C)
                                                                          **Use an X to indicate English Language Proficiency Standards (ELPS) met at the
            PUBLISHER:     Pearson Longman ELT                            Beginning (B), Intermediate (I) and/or Advanced (A) levels for each standard.
             GRADE(S):     6-8

SSS STANDARD/              STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE                             ELPS MET**
ACCESS POINT               DESCRIPTION                                              TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*       B       I      A
Grade 7: Reading Process

                           Standard: The student demonstrates the
                           ability to read grade level text orally with
Fluency                    accuracy, appropriate rate, and expression.
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 27, 55, 58, 90, 103, 120,
                                                                               141, 181, 184, 207, 233, 250, 287, 299,
                                                                               316, 349, 379, 382; Reading Handbook:
                           The student will adjust reading rate based on       How to Improve Reading Fluency,
LA.7.1.5.1                 purpose, text difficulty, form, and style.          426–427                                      I         X       X      X
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 27, 55, 58, 90, 103, 120,
                                                                               141, 181, 184, 207, 233, 250, 287, 299,
                                                                               316, 349, 379, 382; Reading Handbook:
                                                                               How to Improve Reading Fluency,
LA.7.1.5.In.a              The student will read text with accuracy.           426–427                                      I         X       X
                                                                               SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 19, 33, 49, 73, 85,
                           The student will read text with high frequency      97, 109, 135, 147, 159, 175, 199, 213,
                           sight words and phonetically regular words with     225, 239, 265, 281, 305, 331, 343, 355,
LA.7.1.5.Su.a              accuracy.                                           371, 393,                                    I         X       X
                                                                               SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                               visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                               Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                               Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                               Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                               Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                               Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                               451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                               50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                               social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                               226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                           The student will respond accurately and
                                                                               Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                           consistently to pictures or symbols of persons,
                                                                               T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                           objects, or events in familiar stories and daily
                                                                               T324, T326, T392
LA.7.1.5.Pa.a              activities; and                                                                                  I         X

                                                                           Grade 7                                                                   Page 34
SSS STANDARD/            STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT             DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                         The student will identify pictures or symbols        Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                         paired with words to indicate the next step in       T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
LA.7.1.5.Pa.b            familiar daily activities.                           T324, T326, T392                               I     X
                         Standard: The student develops grade
Vocabulary Development   appropriate vocabulary.                                                                             I
                                                                              SE/TE: Vocabulary, 5, 17, 31, 47, 71, 83,
                                                                              95, 107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197, 211,
                                                                              223, 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329, 341,
                                                                              353, 369; Academic Words, 6, 18, 32, 48,
                                                                              72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146, 158, 174, 198,
                         The student will use new vocabulary that is          212, 224, 238, 264, 280, 292, 304, 330,
LA.7.1.6.1               introduced and taught directly;                      342, 354, 370                                  I     X   X   X
                                                                              Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: novel excerpt,
                                                                              8–11, 266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273;
                                                                              myth, 74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                                                                              110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
                         The student will listen to, read, and discuss        306–311; radio play, 356–363
LA.7.1.6.2               familiar and conceptually challenging text;                                                         I     X   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 17, 31, 47,
                                                                              71, 83, 95, 107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197,
                                                                              211, 223, 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329,
                                                                              341, 353, 369; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                              6, 18, 32, 48, 72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146,
                         The student will use context clues to determine      158, 174, 198, 212, 224, 238, 264, 280,
LA.7.1.6.3               meanings of unfamiliar words;                        292, 304, 330, 342, 354, 370                   I     X   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 19, 33, 49, 73, 85,
                                                                              97, 109, 135, 147, 159, 175, 199, 213,
                         The student will categorize key vocabulary and       225, 239, 265, 281, 305, 331, 343, 355,
LA.7.1.6.4               identify salient features;                           371, 393,                                      I     X   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 17, 31, 47,
                                                                              71, 83, 95, 107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197,
                                                                              211, 223, 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329,
                                                                              341, 353, 369; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                              6, 18, 32, 48, 72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146,
                         The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar   158, 174, 198, 212, 224, 238, 264, 280,
LA.7.1.6.5               words;                                               292, 304, 330, 342, 354, 370                   I     X   X   X
                         The student will distinguish denotative and          For related activities see: SE/TE:
LA.7.1.6.6               connotative meanings of words;                       Synonyms, 213, 265; Antonyms, 331              I     X   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Prefixes, 7, 135; Suffixes, 85;
                         The student will identify and understand the         Roots vict, laps, vis, mem, mand, 73;
                         meaning of conceptually advanced prefixes,           Words ending in –ible/–able, 355; Roots
LA.7.1.6.7               suffixes, and root words;                            astro, cycl, equ, 371                          I     X   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 19, 33, 49, 73, 85,
                                                                              97, 109, 135, 147, 159, 175, 199, 213,
                         The student will identify advanced word/phrase       225, 239, 265, 281, 305, 331, 343, 355,
LA.7.1.6.8               relationships and their meanings;                    371, 393,                                      I     X   X   X

                                                                          Grade 7                                                          Page 35
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                     I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                   For related activities see: SE/TE:
                The student will determine the correct meaning of Synonyms, 167; Antonyms, 301;
LA.7.1.6.9      words with multiple meanings in context;           Homophones, 221                                   I     X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                The student will determine meanings of words,      dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                pronunciation, parts of speech, etymologies, and TE: Dictionary, T231; Online Dictionary,
                alternate word choices by using a dictionary,      T307; Thesaurus, T21, T41, T75, T217
LA.7.1.6.10     thesaurus, and digital tools; and                                                                    I     X   X   X
                                                                   For related activities see: SE/TE: Prefixes,
                                                                   7, 135; Suffixes, 85; Roots vict, laps, vis,
                The student will identify the meaning of words and mem, mand, 73; Words ending in
                phrases derived from Anglo-Saxon, Greek, and       –ible/–able, 355; Roots astro, cycl, equ,
LA.7.1.6.11     Latin mythology.                                   371                                               I     X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Vocabulary, 5, 17, 31, 47, 71, 83,
                                                                   95, 107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197, 211,
                                                                   223, 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329, 341,
                                                                   353, 369; Academic Words, 6, 18, 32, 48,
                                                                   72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146, 158, 174, 198,
                The student will use new vocabulary that is        212, 224, 238, 264, 280, 292, 304, 330,
LA.7.1.6.In.a   introduced and taught directly;                    342, 354, 370                                     I     X   X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: novel excerpt,
                                                                      8–11, 266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273;
                                                                      myth, 74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                                                                      110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
                The student will listen to, read, and discuss a       306–311; radio play, 356–363
LA.7.1.6.In.b   variety of text;                                                                                     I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 17, 31, 47,
                                                                   71, 83, 95, 107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197,
                                                                   211, 223, 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329,
                                                                   341, 353, 369; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                   6, 18, 32, 48, 72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146,
                The student will use context clues and graphics to 158, 174, 198, 212, 224, 238, 264, 280,
LA.7.1.6.In.c   determine meaning of unknown words;                292, 304, 330, 342, 354, 370                      I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 19, 33, 49, 73, 85,
                                                                      97, 109, 135, 147, 159, 175, 199, 213,
                                                                      225, 239, 265, 281, 305, 331, 343, 355,
LA.7.1.6.In.d   The student will categorize key vocabulary;           371, 393,                                      I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 17, 31, 47,
                                                                      71, 83, 95, 107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197,
                                                                      211, 223, 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329,
                                                                      341, 353, 369; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                      6, 18, 32, 48, 72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146,
                The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar    158, 174, 198, 212, 224, 238, 264, 280,
LA.7.1.6.In.e   words;                                                292, 304, 330, 342, 354, 370                   I     X   X




                                                                  Grade 7                                                          Page 36
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                   SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 19, 33, 49, 73, 85,
                                                                   97, 109, 135, 147, 159, 175, 199, 213,
                The student will use phonics skills to decode      225, 239, 265, 281, 305, 331, 343, 355,
LA.7.1.6.In.f   words with special vowel spellings;                371, 393,                                        I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Prefixes, 7, 135; Suffixes, 85;
                                                                   Roots vict, laps, vis, mem, mand, 73;
                The student will recognize and use prefixes (mis-, Words ending in –ible/–able, 355; Roots
LA.7.1.6.In.g   in-) and suffixes (-er);                           astro, cycl, equ, 371                            I     X   X
                The student will determine the meaning of a word SE/TE: Synonyms, 167; Antonyms, 301;
                with multiple meanings (e.g., homographs) in       Homophones, 221
LA.7.1.6.In.h   context; and                                                                                        I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                                                                   dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                The student will determine the meaning of          TE: Dictionary, T231; Online Dictionary,
                unknown words using a dictionary and digital       T307; Thesaurus, T21, T41, T75, T217
LA.7.1.6.In.i   tools.                                                                                              I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                   meet individual needs: Vocabulary, 5, 17,
                                                                   31, 47, 71, 83, 95, 107, 133, 145, 157,
                                                                   173, 197, 211, 223, 237, 261, 279, 291,
                                                                   303, 329, 341, 353, 369; Academic Words,
                                                                   6, 18, 32, 48, 72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146,
                The student will use new vocabulary that is        158, 174, 198, 212, 224, 238, 264, 280,
LA.7.1.6.Su.a   introduced and taught directly;                    292, 304, 330, 342, 354, 370                     I     X   X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: novel excerpt,
                                                                      8–11, 266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273;
                                                                      myth, 74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                                                                      110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
                The student will listen to, read, and discuss a       306–311; radio play, 356–363
LA.7.1.6.Su.b   variety of text;                                                                                    I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 17, 31, 47,
                                                                     71, 83, 95, 107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197,
                                                                     211, 223, 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329,
                                                                     341, 353, 369; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                     6, 18, 32, 48, 72, 84, 96, 108, 134, 146,
                The student will use context clues and illustrations 158, 174, 198, 212, 224, 238, 264, 280,
LA.7.1.6.Su.c   to determine meaning of unknown words;               292, 304, 330, 342, 354, 370                   I     X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Linguistic Note (Word Study), 7,
                                                                     19, 33, 49, 73, 85, 97, 109, 135, 147, 159,
                                                                     175, 199, 213, 225, 239, 265, 281, 305,
LA.7.1.6.Su.d   The student will categorize key vocabulary;          331, 343, 355, 371, 393,                       I     X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction
                                                                     (Vocabulary), 5, 17, 31, 47, 71, 83, 95,
                                                                     107, 133, 145, 157, 173, 197, 211, 223,
                The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar 237, 261, 279, 291, 303, 329, 341, 353,
LA.7.1.6.Su.e   words;                                               369                                            I     X   X

                                                                  Grade 7                                                         Page 37
SSS STANDARD/           STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT            DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                           SE/TE: Prefixes, 7, 135; Suffixes, 85; also
                        The student will use phonics skills to decode      see: Compound nouns, 33; Compound
LA.7.1.6.Su.f           phonetically regular multi-syllabic words;         words, 393                                     I     X   X
                                                                           For related activities see: SE/TE How to
                                                                           Use Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                           Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                           Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                           Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                           Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
LA.7.1.6.Su.g           The student will recognize common abbreviations; 451–455                                          I     X   X
                        The student will recognize and use common          SE/TE: Suffixes, 85
LA.7.1.6.Su.h           suffixes (-s, -es);                                                                               I     X   X
                        The student will recognize synonyms, antonyms, SE/TE: Synonyms, 213, 265; Antonyms,
LA.7.1.6.Su.i           and homophones; and                                331                                            I     X   X
                                                                           SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                                                                           dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                        The student will determine the meaning of          TE: Dictionary, T231; Online Dictionary,
                        unknown words using a picture dictionary and       T307; Thesaurus, T21, T41, T75, T217
LA.7.1.6.Su.j           digital tools.                                                                                    I     X   X
                                                                           SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                           meet individual needs: Vocabulary, 5, 17,
                                                                           31, 47, 71, 83, 95, 107, 133, 145, 157,
                        The student will respond to new vocabulary that is 173, 197, 211, 223, 237, 261, 279, 291,
LA.7.1.6.Pa.a           introduced and taught directly;                    303, 329, 341, 353, 369                        I     X
                                                                           SE/TE: Review and Practice, 12, 26, 42,
                                                                           54, 78, 90, 102, 116, 140, 152, 168, 180,
                        The student will listen and respond to stories and 206, 218, 232, 246, 274, 286, 298, 312,
LA.7.1.6.Pa.b           informational text;                                336, 348, 364, 378                             I     X
                        The student will identify persons, objects, and    SE/TE: In Your Own Words, 26, 54, 90,
LA.7.1.6.Pa.c           actions by name or characteristic; and             102, 140, 206, 232, 286, 298, 348, 378         I     X
                                                                           SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                           visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                           Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                           Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                           Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                           Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                           Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                           451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                           50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                           social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                           226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                                                                           Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                        The student will select and respond to objects,
                                                                           T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                        pictures, or symbols paired with words in familiar
                                                                           T324, T326, T392
LA.7.1.6.Pa.d           school activities.                                                                                I     X
                        Standard: The student uses a variety of
Reading Comprehension   strategies to comprehend grade level text.

                                                                     Grade 7                                                            Page 38
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                      SE/TE: Strategies: Predict, 7; Preview, 33;
                                                                      Prepare to Read: Background Knowledge,
                                                                      4, 16, 30, 46, 70, 82, 94, 106, 132, 144,
                                                                      156, 172, 196, 210, 222, 236, 260, 278,
                                                                      290, 302, 328, 340, 352, 368; Set a
                The student will use background knowledge of
                                                                      Purpose for Reading, 8, 20, 34, 41, 50, 74,
                subject and related content areas, prereading
                                                                      86, 98, 101, 110, 136,148, 151, 160, 176,
                strategies, graphic representations, and
                                                                      200, 214, 226, 240, 244, 245, 266, 272,
                knowledge of text structure to make and confirm
                                                                      273, 294, 306, 332, 334, 344, 356, 372
                complex predictions of content, purpose, and
LA.7.1.7.1      organization of a reading selection;                                                                 I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author’s
                                                                      Purpose, 231; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
                The student will analyze the authors purpose          250, 316, 382; also see: About the Author,
                (e.g., to persuade, inform, entertain, explain) and   11, 25, 53, 77, 89, 101, 115, 139, 150,
                perspective in a variety of texts and understand      167, 179, 217, 231, 243, 271, 285, 297,
LA.7.1.7.2      how they affect meaning;                              311, 335, 347, 363                             I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Strategies: identify main idea and
                The student will determine the main idea or       details, 49; identify problems and solution,
                essential message in grade-level or higher texts  73; connect ideas, 135; make
                through inferring, paraphrasing, summarizing, and generalizations, 265; summarize, 293;
LA.7.1.7.3      identifying relevant details;                     evaluate new information, 343                      I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Strategies: identify problems and
                                                                      solution, 73; recognize cause and effect,
                The student will identify cause-and-effect            97; recognize sequence, 239; Grammar:
LA.7.1.7.4      relationships in text;                                Cause and effect structures, 380               I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Strategies: analyze text structure,
                                                                      355; identify problems and solution, 73;
                                                                      recognize cause and effect, 97; recognize
                The student will analyze a variety of text            sequence, 239 Cause and effect
                structures (e.g., comparison/contrast,                structures, 380; also see: Informational
                cause/effect, chronological order,                    Text, 20–25, 50–53, 86–89, 98–101,
                argument/support, lists) and text features (main      136–139, 176–179, 200–205, 226–231,
                headings with subheadings) and explain their          282–285, 294–297, 344–347, 372–377
LA.7.1.7.5      impact on meaning in text;                                                                           I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: For related information see:
                                                                      Literary terms: theme, 237; also see: The
                                                                      Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46, 70, 82, 94,
                                                                      106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196, 210, 222,
                The student will analyze and evaluate similar         236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328, 340, 352,
                themes or topics by different authors across a        368; Link the Readings, 58, 110, 250, 316,
LA.7.1.7.6      variety of fiction and nonfiction selections;         382                                            I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                The student will compare and contrast elements in 331; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 110,
LA.7.1.7.7      multiple texts; and                               250, 316, 382                                      I     X   X   X




                                                               Grade 7                                                             Page 39
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                       SE/TE: Comprehension, 12, 26, 42, 54,
                The student will use strategies to repair              78, 90, 102, 116, 140, 152, 168, 180, 206,
                comprehension of grade-appropriate text when           218, 232, 246, 274–275, 286, 298,
                self-monitoring indicates confusion, including but     312–313, 336–337, 348, 364, 378
                not limited to rereading, checking context clues,
                predicting, note-making, summarizing, using
                graphic and semantic organizers, questioning,
LA.7.1.7.8      and clarifying by checking other sources.                                                              I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: Predict, 7; Preview, 33;
                The student will use background knowledge of the also see: Set a Purpose for Reading, 8,
                subject, guided previewing strategies, graphic         20, 34, 41, 50, 74, 86, 98, 101, 110,
                representations, and text features (e.g., table of     136,148, 151, 160, 176, 200, 214, 226,
                contents, headings, simple charts and maps, text 240, 244, 245, 266, 272, 273, 294, 306,
                styles) to make and confirm predictions of content 332, 334, 344, 356,
LA.7.1.7.In.a   and purpose of reading selections;                                                                     I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author’s
                                                                       Purpose, 231; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
                The student will identify the author’s purpose         250, 316, 382; also see: About the Author,
                (e.g., to inform, entertain, persuade) in a variety of 11, 25, 53, 77, 89, 101, 115, 139, 150,
                texts and use the information to construct             167, 179, 217, 231, 243, 271, 285, 297,
LA.7.1.7.In.b   meaning;                                               311, 335, 347, 363                              I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: identify main idea and
                                                                       details, 49; identify problems and solution,
                The student will determine the main idea or            73; connect ideas, 135; make
                essential message in text through identifying          generalizations, 265; summarize, 293;
LA.7.1.7.In.c   relevant details and facts;                            evaluate new information, 343                   I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: identify problems and
                                                                       solution, 73; recognize cause and effect,
                The student will identify cause and effect             97; recognize sequence, 239; Grammar:
LA.7.1.7.In.d   relationships in stories and informational text;       Cause and effect structures, 380                I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: analyze text structure,
                                                                       355; identify problems and solution, 73;
                                                                       recognize cause and effect, 97; recognize
                                                                       sequence, 239 Cause and effect
                The student will identify text structures (e.g.,       structures, 380; also see: Informational
                comparison/contrast, explicit cause and effect         Text, 20–25, 50–53, 86–89, 98–101,
                relationships, sequence of events) in narrative        136–139, 176–179, 200–205, 226–231,
                and informational text using strategies, including     282–285, 294–297, 344–347, 372–377
LA.7.1.7.In.e   graphic organizers;                                                                                    I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46,
                                                                       70, 82, 94, 106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196,
                                                                       210, 222, 236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328,
                The student will identify the theme in fiction or      340, 352, 368; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
LA.7.1.7.In.f   nonfiction selections;                                 250, 316, 382                                   I     X   X




                                                                   Grade 7                                                           Page 40
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will identify similarities and             SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                differences in characters, actions, or settings in     331; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 110,
LA.7.1.7.In.g   two texts; and                                         250, 316, 382                                   I     X   X
                The student will use strategies to repair              SE/TE: Comprehension, 12, 26, 42, 54,
                comprehension, including but not limited to            78, 90, 102, 116, 140, 152, 168, 180, 206,
                rereading, checking context clues, predicting,         218, 232, 246, 274–275, 286, 298,
                using graphic organizers, and requesting               312–313, 336–337, 348, 364, 378
LA.7.1.7.In.h   assistance for clarification.                                                                          I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                       visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                       Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                       Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                       Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                       Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                       Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                       451–455; also see: Set a Purpose for
                                                                       Reading, 8, 20, 34, 41, 50, 74, 86, 98, 101,
                The student will use background knowledge of the
                                                                       110, 136,148, 151, 160, 176, 200, 214,
                subject and text features (e.g., illustrations, title,
                                                                       226, 240, 244, 245, 266, 272, 273, 294,
                table of contents) to make and confirm predictions
                                                                       306, 332, 334, 344, 356, 372
LA.7.1.7.Su.a   of content of reading selections;                                                                      I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author’s
                                                                       Purpose, 231; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
                                                                       250, 316, 382; also see: About the Author,
                The student will identify the author’s purpose         11, 25, 53, 77, 89, 101, 115, 139, 150,
                (e.g., tell a story, give information, explain how to 167, 179, 217, 231, 243, 271, 285, 297,
LA.7.1.7.Su.b   do something, elicit feelings) in texts;               311, 335, 347, 363                              I     X   X
                The student will determine the main idea or            SE/TE: Strategies: identify main idea and
                essential message in text through identifying          details, 49; identify problems and solution,
                relevant details and events, including but not         73; connect ideas, 135; make
                limited to who, what, where, when, and what            generalizations, 265; summarize, 293;
LA.7.1.7.Su.c   happened;                                              evaluate new information, 343                   I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                The student will identify similarities and             331; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 110,
                differences in characters, settings, and actions,      250, 316, 382
                and explicit cause/effect relationships in stories
                and informational text using strategies, including
LA.7.1.7.Su.d   but not limited to simple graphic organizers;                                                          I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: For related information see:
                                                                       Literary terms: theme, 237; also see: The
                                                                       Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46, 70, 82, 94,
                                                                       106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196, 210, 222,
                The student will identify fiction and nonfiction       236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328, 340, 352,
                selections based on a theme (e.g., bravery,            368; Link the Readings, 58, 110, 250, 316,
LA.7.1.7.Su.e   friendship); and                                       382                                             I     X   X




                                                                   Grade 7                                                           Page 41
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                      PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                      I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will use strategies to repair          Add’l TE: Practice (Comprehension), 12,
                comprehension, including but not limited to re-    26, 42, 54, 78, 90, 102, 116, 140, 152,
                reading, checking context clues, predicting, using 168, 180, 206, 218, 232, 246, 274–275,
                graphic organizers, and checking own               286, 298, 312–313, 336–337, 348, 364,
LA.7.1.7.Su.f   understanding when reminded.                       378                                                I     X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt, 8–11,
                                                                     266–271; science text, 20–25, 50–53,
                                                                     98–101, 176–179, 200¬–205,372–377;
                                                                     poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; myth, 74–77,
                                                                     332–335; social studies text, 86–89,
                                                                     136–139, 226–231, 282–285, 294–297,
                                                                     344–347; historical fiction, 110–115;
                                                                     interview, 148–150; short story, 160–167;
                                                                     letters, 214–217; essay, 240–243; song
                The student will identify persons, objects, actions,
                                                                     lyrics, 272; tall tales, 306–311; radio play,
                or events in read-aloud narrative and
                                                                     356–363
LA.7.1.7.Pa.a   informational text used in daily activities;                                                          I     X
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                     visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                     Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                     Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                     Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                     Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                     Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                     451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                     50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                     social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                     226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                The student will respond accurately and
                                                                     T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                consistently to pictures or symbols paired with
                                                                     T324, T326, T392
LA.7.1.7.Pa.b   words used to guide classroom activities;                                                             I     X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt, 8–11,
                                                                     266–271; science text, 20–25, 50–53,
                                                                     98–101, 176–179, 200¬–205,372–377;
                                                                     poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; myth, 74–77,
                                                                     332–335; social studies text, 86–89,
                                                                     136–139, 226–231, 282–285, 294–297,
                                                                     344–347; historical fiction, 110–115;
                                                                     interview, 148–150; short story, 160–167;
                                                                     letters, 214–217; essay, 240–243; song
                                                                     lyrics, 272; tall tales, 306–311; radio play,
                The student will recognize details in read-aloud
                                                                     356–363
LA.7.1.7.Pa.c   stories and informational text;                                                                       I     X




                                                               Grade 7                                                              Page 42
SSS STANDARD/                STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                            PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT                 DESCRIPTION                                                     TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                                     visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                                     Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                                     Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                                     Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                                     Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                                     Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                                     451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                                     50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                                     social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                                     226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                             The student will use pictures or symbols paired
                                                                                     T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                             with words to achieve desired cause/effect
                                                                                     T324, T326, T392
LA.7.1.7.Pa.d                outcomes in daily classroom activities;                                                                I     X
                                                                                     Add’l TE: The Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46,
                                                                                     70, 82, 94, 106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196,
                                                                                     210, 222, 236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328,
                             The student will recognize familiar read-aloud          340, 352, 368; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
LA.7.1.7.Pa.e                stories with a theme (e.g., caring); and                250, 316, 382                                  I     X
                                                                               SE/TE: Dictionary, 27; How to use a
                                                                               dictionary and thesaurus, 406–407; Add’l
                             The student will use resources when necessary to TE: Dictionary, T231; Online Dictionary,
                             clarify meaning of pictures, symbols, or words in T307; Thesaurus, T21, T41, T75, T217
LA.7.1.7.Pa.f                classroom activities.                                                                                  I     X
Grade 7: Literary Analysis

                             Standard: The student identifies, analyzes,
                             and applies knowledge of the elements of a
                             variety of fiction and literary texts to develop a
Fiction                      thoughtful response to a literary selection.
                                                                                     SE/TE: Genre: novel excerpt, 8–11,
                             The student will identify and analyze the               266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; myth,
                             characteristics of various genres (e.g., poetry,        74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                             fiction, short story, dramatic literature) as forms     110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
LA.7.2.1.1                   with distinct characteristics and purposes;             306–311; radio play, 356–363                   I     X   X   X
                             The student will locate and analyze elements of         SE/TE: Literary terms: character, plot, 71;
                             characterization, setting, and plot, including rising   character motivation, 157; conflict,
                             action, conflict, resolution, theme, and other          foreshadowing, 211; flashback, 263; hero,
                             literary elements as appropriate in a variety of        heroine, 329
LA.7.2.1.2                   fiction;                                                                                               I     X   X   X
                             The student will locate various literary devices        SE/TE: Poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; Literary
                             (e.g., sound, meter, figurative and descriptive         terms: figurative language, 31, metaphor,
                             language), graphics, and structure and analyze          107, extended metaphor, 145, rhyme, 237
                             how they contribute to mood and meaning in
LA.7.2.1.3                   poetry;                                                                                                I     X   X   X



                                                                              Grade 7                                                             Page 43
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                     I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                       SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46,
                                                                       70, 82, 94, 106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196,
                The student will identify and analyze recurring        210, 222, 236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328,
                themes across a variety of works (e.g., bravery,       340, 352, 368; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
LA.7.2.1.4      friendship, loyalty, good vs. evil);                   250, 316, 382                                     I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Response to Literature, 13, 27, 43,
                The student will develop an interpretation of a     55, 79, 91, 103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181,
                selection and support through sustained use of      207, 219, 247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337,
LA.7.2.1.5      examples and contextual evidence;                   349, 365, 379                                        I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: For related information see:
                                                                    Literary terms: theme, 237; also see: The
                                                                    Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46, 70, 82, 94,
                The student will compare the use of the same        106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196, 210, 222,
                theme in two different literary genres, using their 236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328, 340, 352,
                structural features as the basis for the comparison 368; Link the Readings, 58, 110, 250, 316,
LA.7.2.1.6      (e.g., novel and play, poem and short story);       382                                                  I     X   X   X
                The student will locate and analyze an author's     SE/TE: Literary terms: figurative language,
                use of allusions and descriptive, idiomatic, and    31, metaphor, 107, extended metaphor,
                figurative language in a variety of literary text,  145, rhyme, 237
                identifying how word choice is used to appeal to
                the reader's senses and emotions, providing
LA.7.2.1.7      evidence from text to support t                                                                          I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: myth, 74–77, 332–335;
                                                                       historical fiction, 110–115; short tall tales,
                The student will explain how ideas, values, and        306–311; also see: Projects: Continue
                themes of a literary work often reflect the historical Story, 59, Retell a Folktale, 125
LA.7.2.1.8      period in which it was written;                                                                          I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: historical fiction, 110–115;
                The student will describe changes in the English Word Study: Foreign words, 175
                language over time, and support these
LA.7.2.1.9      descriptions with examples from literary texts; and                                                      I     X   X   X
                The student will use interest and recommendation SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                of others to select a balance of age and ability       251, 317, 383
                appropriate fiction materials to read (e.g., novels,
                historical fiction, mythology, poetry) to expand the
                core foundation of knowledge necessary to
                function as a fully literate member of a shared
LA.7.2.1.10     culture.                                                                                                 I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: novel excerpt, 8–11,
                                                                       266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; myth,
                The student will identify differences in               74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                characteristics of various genres of literature (e.g., 110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
LA.7.2.1.In.a   fiction, poetry, drama);                               306–311; radio play, 356–363                      I     X   X




                                                                 Grade 7                                                               Page 44
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                            PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                      TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will identify setting, plot structure,      SE/TE: Literary terms: character, plot, 71;
                theme, and elements of character development            character motivation, 157; conflict,
                (e.g., dialogue, thoughts, actions) in works of         foreshadowing, 211; flashback, 263; hero,
LA.7.2.1.In.b   literature;                                             heroine, 329                                      I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; Literary
                The student will identify literary devices (e.g.,       terms: figurative language, 31, metaphor,
                sound, descriptive language, line length,               107, extended metaphor, 145, rhyme, 237
LA.7.2.1.In.c   illustrations) in poetry;                                                                                 I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46,
                                                                        70, 82, 94, 106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196,
                                                                        210, 222, 236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328,
                The student will identify themes (e.g., bravery,        340, 352, 368; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
LA.7.2.1.In.d   friendship, caring) in fiction, poetry, or drama;       250, 316, 382                                     I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Literary response and evaluation:
                                                                        writing thank–you letters, 43; writing letters
                The student will write a reflection that describes      to editor, 219; finding myths, 337; writing
                how the literature selection connects to life           poem or making picture about dreams, 247
LA.7.2.1.In.e   experiences and impacts the reader;                                                                       I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Response to Literature, 13, 27, 43,
                The student will write a review or brief report on      55, 79, 91, 103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181,
                two works of literature that identifies similarities    207, 219, 247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337,
LA.7.2.1.In.f   and differences in theme or plot structure;             349, 365, 379                                     I     X   X
                The student will identify literary devices (e.g.,       SE/TE: Literary Terms, 5, 31, 107, 145,
                sound, descriptive language) in drama and               157, 211, 237, 263, 303, 353
LA.7.2.1.In.g   stories;                                                                                                  I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Genre: myth, 74–77, 332–335;
                                                                        historical fiction, 110–115; short tall tales,
                                                                        306–311; also see: Projects: Continue
                The student will identify information about the         Story, 59, Retell a Folktale, 125
LA.7.2.1.In.h   historical time periods reflected in literary works;                                                      I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: myth, 74–77, 332–335;
                                                                       historical fiction, 110–115; short tall tales,
                The student will identify differences in vocabulary 306–311; also see: Projects: Continue
                and language of contemporary and historical            Story, 59, Retell a Folktale, 125
LA.7.2.1.In.i   texts; and                                                                                                I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                The student will select a variety of fiction materials 251, 317, 383
                based on interest and recommendations to
                expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.7.2.1.In.j   member of a shared culture.                                                                               I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Genre: novel excerpt, 8–11,
                                                                        266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; myth,
                                                                        74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                The student will identify basic characteristics of      110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
LA.7.2.1.Su.a   various genres of literature (e.g., fiction, poetry);   306–311; radio play, 356–363                      I     X   X

                                                                    Grade 7                                                             Page 45
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                            PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                        SE/TE: Literary terms: character, plot, 71;
                The student will identify characters, setting,          character motivation, 157; conflict,
                events, and main problem and solution in read-          foreshadowing, 211; flashback, 263; hero,
LA.7.2.1.Su.b   aloud literature;                                       heroine, 329                                    I     X   X
                The student will identify literary devices (e.g.,       SE/TE: Literary terms, 5, 31, 107, 145,
                words that describe people, objects, feelings) in       157, 211, 237, 263, 303, 353
LA.7.2.1.Su.c   poetry, drama, and stories;                                                                             I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Literary terms: theme, 237; also
                                                                        see: Genre: poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273;
                                                                        myth, 74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                                                                        110–115; interview, 148–150; tall tales,
                                                                        306–311; The Big Question, 4, 16, 30, 46,
                                                                        70, 82, 94, 106, 132, 144, 156, 172, 196,
                The student will identify fiction stories, poetry, or   210, 222, 236, 260, 278, 290, 302, 328,
                drama based on a theme (e.g., bravery,                  340, 352, 368; Link the Readings, 58, 110,
LA.7.2.1.Su.d   friendship);                                            250, 316, 382                                   I     X   X
                                                                       Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction, 13, 27,
                The student will write a reflection for a literature   43, 55, 79, 91, 103, 117, 141, 153, 169,
                selection that describes how the story connects to 181, 207, 219, 247, 275, 287, 299, 313,
LA.7.2.1.Su.e   life experiences;                                      337, 349, 365, 379                               I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                The student will write a brief report on a literature 331; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 110,
                selection that identifies similarities and differences 250, 316, 382
LA.7.2.1.Su.f   in characters, settings, and actions;                                                                   I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; Literary
                The student will recognize the meaning of              terms: figurative language, 31, metaphor,
                common idioms (e.g., green thumb) and figurative 107, extended metaphor, 145, rhyme, 237
LA.7.2.1.Su.g   language (e.g., pretty as a picture) in literature;                                                     I     X   X
                The student will identify information about            For related activities see: SE/TE: Genre:
                characters, settings, and events reflected in          historical fiction, 110–115
LA.7.2.1.Su.h   historical stories;                                                                                     I     X   X
                The student will identify differences in vocabulary For related activities see: SE/TE: Genre:
LA.7.2.1.Su.i   used in historical stories; and                        historical fiction, 110–115                      I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                The student will select a variety of fiction materials 251, 317, 383
                based on interest and recommendations to
                expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.7.2.1.Su.j   member of a shared culture.                                                                             I     X   X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: novel excerpt,
                                                                      8–11, 266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273;
                                                                      myth, 74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                The student will use pictures, symbols, or words 110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
                to identify characters, objects, and actions in read- 306–311; radio play, 356–363
LA.7.2.1.Pa.a   aloud literature (e.g., fiction, poetry);                                                               I     X



                                                                  Grade 7                                                             Page 46
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                     SE/TE: Poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273; Literary
                                                                     terms: figurative language, 31, metaphor,
                The student will recognize rhythm, sounds and        107, extended metaphor, 145, rhyme, 237
LA.7.2.1.Pa.b   words in read-aloud poetry, songs, and stories;                                                      I     X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: novel excerpt,
                                                                     8–11, 266–271; poetry, 41, 151, 245, 273;
                                                                     myth, 74–77, 332–335; historical fiction,
                The student will recognize familiar read-aloud       110–115; short story, 160–167; tall tales,
                stories, poems, or drama with a theme (e.g.,         306–311; radio play, 356–363
LA.7.2.1.Pa.c   friendship);                                                                                         I     X
                                                                   Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction, 13, 27,
                The student will recognize words that describe     43, 55, 79, 91, 103, 117, 141, 153, 169,
                people, objects, and actions in read-aloud         181, 207, 219, 247, 275, 287, 299, 313,
LA.7.2.1.Pa.d   literature; and                                    337, 349, 365, 379                                I     X
                The student will select fiction materials based on SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                interest and recommendations to expand the core 251, 317, 383
                foundation of knowledge necessary to function as
LA.7.2.1.Pa.e   a member of a shared culture.                                                                        I     X

                Standard: The student identifies, analyzes,
                and applies knowledge of the elements of a
                variety of non-fiction, informational, and
                expository texts to demonstrate an
Non-Fiction     understanding of the information presented.
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                     visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                     Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                     Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                     Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                     Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                     Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                     451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                     50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                     social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                     226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                The student will locate, use, and analyze specific
                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                information from organizational text features (e.g.,
                                                                     T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                table of contents, headings, captions, bold print,
                                                                     T324, T326, T392
LA.7.2.2.1      italics, glossaries, indices, key/guide words);                                                      I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: identify main idea and
                                                                     details, 49; identify problems and solution,
                The student will use information from the text to    73; connect ideas, 135; make
                state the main idea and/or provide relevant          generalizations, 265; summarize, 293;
LA.7.2.2.2      details;                                             evaluate new information, 343                   I     X   X   X




                                                                 Grade 7                                                           Page 47
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will organize information to show         SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57,
                understanding (e.g., representing main ideas          62, 81, 93, 105, 119, 124, 143, 155, 171,
                within text through charting, mapping,                183, 188, 209, 221, 235, 249, 254, 277,
                paraphrasing, summarizing, or                         289, 301, 315, 320, 339, 351, 367, 381,
LA.7.2.2.3      comparing/contrasting);                               386                                            I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Genre: science text, 20–25, 50–53,
                The student will identify the characteristics of a  98–101, 176–179, 200¬–205,372–377;
                variety of types of text and how they are alike and social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                different(e.g., reference works, reports, technical 226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                manuals, newspapers, magazines, biographies,        essay, 240–243
LA.7.2.2.4      periodicals, procedures, instructions); and                                                          I     X   X   X
                The student will use interest and recommendation SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                of others to select a variety of age and ability    251, 317, 383
                appropriate nonfiction materials (e.g., biographies
                and topical areas, such as science, music, art,
                history, sports, current events) to expand the core
                knowledge necessary to connect topics and
                function as a fully literate member of a shared
LA.7.2.2.5      culture.                                                                                             I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                     visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                     Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                     Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                     Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                     Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                     Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                     451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                     50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                     social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                     226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                The student will locate information in text features
                                                                     T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                (e.g., table of contents, headings, simple charts
                                                                     T324, T326, T392
LA.7.2.2.In.a   and maps, text styles, glossary);                                                                    I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: identify main idea and
                                                                     details, 49; identify problems and solution,
                The student will use information from nonfiction     73; connect ideas, 135; make
                text to identify the main idea and supporting        generalizations, 265; summarize, 293;
LA.7.2.2.In.b   details;                                             evaluate new information, 343                   I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57,
                                                                      62, 81, 93, 105, 119, 124, 143, 155, 171,
                The student will organize information to show         183, 188, 209, 221, 235, 249, 254, 277,
                understanding (e.g., using graphic organizers,        289, 301, 315, 320, 339, 351, 367, 381,
LA.7.2.2.In.c   guided retelling);                                    386                                            I     X   X




                                                                Grade 7                                                            Page 48
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: science text, 20–25, 50–53,
                                                                       98–101, 176–179, 200¬–205,372–377;
                The student will identify a variety of nonfiction text social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                (e.g., reference materials, dictionaries,              226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
LA.7.2.2.In.d   newspapers, magazines, instructions); and              essay, 240–243                                I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                The student will select a variety of nonfiction      251, 317, 383
                materials based on interest and recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.7.2.2.In.e   member of a shared culture.                                                                          I     X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                         visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                         Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                         Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                         Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                         Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                         Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                         451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                         50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                         social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                         226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                                                                         Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                The student will identify information in text
                                                                         T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                features (e.g., illustrations, title, table of contents,
                                                                         T324, T326, T392
LA.7.2.2.Su.a   headings);                                                                                           I     X   X
                                                                         Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: science text,
                The student will use information from read-aloud 20–25, 50–53, 98–101, 176–179,
                nonfiction text to identify the main idea and            200¬–205,372–377; social studies text,
                supporting details (e.g., who, what, where, when, 86–89, 136–139, 226–231, 282–285,
LA.7.2.2.Su.b   what happened);                                          294–297, 344–347; essay, 240–243            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57,
                                                                     62, 81, 93, 105, 119, 124, 143, 155, 171,
                The student will organize information to show        183, 188, 209, 221, 235, 249, 254, 277,
                understanding (e.g., using simple graphic            289, 301, 315, 320, 339, 351, 367, 381,
LA.7.2.2.Su.c   organizers);                                         386                                             I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: science text, 20–25, 50–53,
                                                                       98–101, 176–179, 200¬–205,372–377;
                The student will identify a variety of nonfiction text social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                (e.g., easy-to-read reference materials,               226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
LA.7.2.2.Su.d   dictionaries, magazines); and                          essay, 240–243                                I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                The student will select a variety of nonfiction      251, 317, 383
                materials based on interest and recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.7.2.2.Su.e   member of a shared culture.                                                                          I     X   X

                                                                Grade 7                                                            Page 49
SSS STANDARD/              STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT               DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                               SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                               meet individual needs: Strategies:
                                                                               preview, 19; use visuals, 85; scan, 199;
                                                                               How to Use Reference Books, 400–401;
                                                                               Skills and Learning Strategies, 404; Maps
                                                                               and Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs,
                                                                               430–431; Graphic Organizers, 432;
                                                                               Conducting Research, 447; Technology
                                                                               Handbook, 451–455; also see: science
                                                                               text, 20–25, 50–53, 98–101, 176–179,
                                                                               200¬, 372–377; social studies text, 86–89,
                                                                               136–139, 226–231, 282–285, 294–297,
                                                                               344–347; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2,
                                                                               T66, T68, T128, T130, T192, T194, T258,
                                                                               T260, T324, T326, T392
                           The student will recognize persons, objects, and
LA.7.2.2.Pa.a              actions in read-aloud informational text;                                                         I     X
                                                                               SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                               meet individual needs: Strategies: Maps
                                                                               and Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs,
                                                                               430–431; Graphic Organizers, 432; Add’l
                           The student will respond purposefully to pictures   TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T128,
                           or symbols paired with words used to guide          T130, T192, T194, T258, T260, T324,
LA.7.2.2.Pa.b              classroom activities;                               T326, T392                                    I     X
                                                                              SE/TE: Expository: logical sequence, 289,
                                                                              320–323; also see: Strategies: preview,
                                                                              19; use visuals, 85; scan, 199; Add’l TE:
                           The student will recognize pictures or symbols     Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T128, T130,
                           paired with words depicting a sequence in familiar T192, T194, T258, T260, T324, T326,
LA.7.2.2.Pa.c              activities; and                                    T392                                           I     X
                                                                              SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 121, 185,
                           The student will select nonfiction materials based 251, 317, 383
                           on interest and recommendations to expand the
                           core foundation of knowledge necessary to
LA.7.2.2.Pa.d              function as a member of a shared culture.                                                         I     X
Grade 7: Writing Process
                           Standard: The student will use prewriting
                           strategies to generate ideas and formulate a
Pre-Writing                plan.
                                                                              SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320,
                           The student will prewrite by generating ideas from 386; The Writing Process, 436-439
                           multiple sources (e.g., prior knowledge,
                           discussion with others, writers notebook, research
                           materials, or other reliable sources) based upon
LA.7.3.1.1                 teacher-directed topics and personal interests;                                                   I     X   X   X




                                                                         Grade 7                                                           Page 50
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                       SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320,
                                                                       386; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                                                                       Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 81, 93,
                The student will prewrite by making a plan for         105, 119, 143, 155, 171, 183, 209, 221,
                writing that addresses purpose, audience, main         235, 249, 277, 289, 301, 315, 339, 351,
LA.7.3.1.2      idea, and logical sequence; and                        367, 381                                         I     X   X   X
                The student will prewrite by using organizational      SE/TE: Graphic Organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57,
                strategies and tools (e.g., technology, outline,       62, 81, 93, 105, 119, 124, 143, 155, 171,
                chart, table, graph, Venn Diagram, web, story          183, 188, 209, 221, 235, 249, 254, 277,
                map, plot pyramid) to develop a personal               289, 301, 315, 320, 339, 351, 367, 381,
LA.7.3.1.3      organizational style.                                  386                                              I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320,
                                                                      386; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                The student will prewrite by generating ideas         Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 81, 93,
                through a variety of activities (e.g., brainstorming, 105, 119, 143, 155, 171, 183, 209, 221,
                graphic organizers, group discussions, reviewing 235, 249, 277, 289, 301, 315, 339, 351,
LA.7.3.1.In.a   printed material);                                    367, 381                                          I     X   X
                The student will prewrite by identifying the           SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320,
                purpose (e.g., inform, entertain, persuade,            386; The Writing Process, 436-439
                explain) and intended audience for the writing;
LA.7.3.1.In.b   and                                                                                                     I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Graphic Organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57,
                The student will prewrite by using graphic           62, 81, 93, 105, 119, 124, 143, 155, 171,
                organizers, charts and outlines to organize main 183, 188, 209, 221, 235, 249, 254, 277,
                ideas and relevant supporting details into a logical 289, 301, 315, 320, 339, 351, 367, 381,
LA.7.3.1.In.c   sequence.                                            386                                                I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320,
                                                                       386; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                The student will prewrite by generating ideas          Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 81, 93,
                through a variety of activities (e.g., responding to   105, 119, 143, 155, 171, 183, 209, 221,
                prompts, viewing pictures, reading text, group         235, 249, 277, 289, 301, 315, 339, 351,
LA.7.3.1.Su.a   discussion) to plan for writing;                       367, 381                                         I     X   X
                The student will prewrite by identifying the           SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320,
                purpose and the intended audience for writing;         386; The Writing Process, 436-439; Modes
LA.7.3.1.Su.b   and                                                    of Writing, 433-435                              I     X   X
                The student will prewrite by using graphic             SE/TE: Supporting main idea with facts
                organizers to arrange main ideas and details in a      and details, 351, 386–391; Supporting
LA.7.3.1.Su.c   logical sequence.                                      reasons and examples, 209                        I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320,
                                                                       386; The Writing Process, 442-445; Add’l
                The student will select a person, object, activity, or TE: Differentiated Instruction, 63, 125, 189,
LA.7.3.1.Pa.a   event as the topic of communication.                   255, 321, 387                                    I     X
                Standard: The student will write a draft
                appropriate to the topic, audience, and
Drafting        purpose.



                                                                Grade 7                                                               Page 51
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will draft writing by developing main     SE/TE: Draft, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320, 387;
                ideas from the pre-writing plan using primary and     The Writing Process, 436-439
                secondary sources appropriate to the purpose
LA.7.3.2.1      and audience;                                                                                        I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Organization: ask and answer a
                                                                     question, 235; cause and effect, 277;
                                                                     chronological order, 57, 119; classify, 315;
                The student will draft writing by organizing         compare and contrast, 143; Draft, 62, 124,
                information into a logical sequence and combining 188, 254, 320, 387; The Writing Process,
LA.7.3.2.2      or deleting sentences to enhance clarity; and        436-439                                         I     X   X   X
                The student will draft writing by analyzing          Writing examples exist for all writing
                language techniques of professional authors          activities: SE/TE: Draft, 62, 124, 188, 254,
                (including concrete and abstract word choices),      320, 387; The Writing Process, 436-439
                and infusing a variety of language techniques to
LA.7.3.2.3      reinforce voice.                                                                                     I     X   X   X
                The student will draft writing by using a prewriting SE/TE: Draft, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320, 387;
                plan to develop main ideas and supporting details; The Writing Process, 436-439
LA.7.3.2.In.a   and                                                                                                  I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Organization: ask and answer a
                                                                     question, 235; cause and effect, 277;
                                                                     chronological order, 57, 119; classify, 315;
                                                                     compare and contrast, 143; Draft, 62, 124,
                The student will draft writing by organizing writing 188, 254, 320, 387; The Writing Process,
LA.7.3.2.In.b   in a clear and logical sequence.                     436-439                                         I     X   X
                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Draft, 62, 124,
                The student will draft writing by using a prewriting 188, 254, 320, 387; The Writing Process,
LA.7.3.2.Su.a   plan to develop ideas related to the topic; and      436-439                                         I     X   X
                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Organization:
                                                                     ask and answer a question, 235; cause
                                                                     and effect, 277; chronological order, 57,
                                                                     119; classify, 315; compare and contrast,
                The student will draft writing by organizing writing 143; Draft, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320, 387;
LA.7.3.2.Su.b   in a logical sequence according to purpose.          The Writing Process, 436-439                    I     X   X
                The student will make an initial attempt to          SE/TE: Draft, 62, 124, 188, 254, 320, 387;
                communicate information about familiar persons, The Writing Process, 436-439; Add’l TE:
                objects, activities, and events using pictures,      Differentiated Instruction, 63, 125, 189,
LA.7.3.2.Pa.a   symbols or words.                                    255, 321, 387                                   I     X

                Standard: The student will revise and refine
Revising        the draft for clarity and effectiveness.
                The student will revise by evaluating the draft for   SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125, 189, 255, 321,
                development of ideas and content, logical             387; The Writing Process, 436-439
                organization, voice, point of view, word choice,
LA.7.3.3.1      and sentence variation;                                                                              I     X   X   X

                                                               Grade 7                                                             Page 52
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                      SE/TE: Writing Checklist, 63, 125, 189,
                The student will revise by creating clarity and logic 255, 321, 387; Rubrics for Writing, 440-
                by rearranging words, sentences, and paragraphs 442
LA.7.3.3.2      and developing relationships among ideas;                                                             I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125, 189, 255, 321,
                The student will revise by creating precision and 387; The Writing Process, 436-439; vivid
                interest by using a variety of sentence structures details, 235; transition words, 119; sensory
                (including the use of participles and participial     details, 15
                phrases at the beginning and end of sentences),
                creative language devices, and modifying word
                choices using resources and reference materials
LA.7.3.3.3      (e.g., dictionary, thesaurus); and                                                                    I     X   X   X
                The student will revise by applying appropriate        SE/TE: Six Traits of Writing Checklist, 63,
                tools or strategies to evaluate and refine the draft   125, 189, 255, 321, 387; Rubrics for
LA.7.3.3.4      (e.g., peer review, checklists, rubrics).              Writing, 440-442                               I     X   X   X
                The student will revise by reviewing for clarity of    SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125, 189, 255, 321,
                content, focus, organization, and word choice and      387; The Writing Process, 436-439
                use of simple and compound sentences to
LA.7.3.3.In.a   express ideas;                                                                                        I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125, 189, 255, 321,
                The student will revise by improving connections       387; The Writing Process, 436-439
                between main ideas and details and modifying
LA.7.3.3.In.b   details to communicate the purpose;                                                                   I     X   X
                The student will revise by changing words and          SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125, 189, 255, 321,
                sentences to clarify the meaning or add interest       387; The Writing Process, 436-439; Add’l
                using resources and reference materials to select      TE: Dictionary, T231
LA.7.3.3.In.c   more precise vocabulary; and                                                                          I     X   X
                The student will revise by using tools and             SE/TE: Writing Checklist, 63, 125, 189,
                strategies (e.g., checklists, rubrics, teacher or      255, 321, 387; Rubrics for Writing, 440-
LA.7.3.3.In.d   peer review) to improve the writing.                   442                                            I     X   X
                                                                       Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                The student will revise by reviewing the draft for     individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125,
                clarity of content and organization and use of         189, 255, 321, 387; The Writing Process,
LA.7.3.3.Su.a   complete sentences to express ideas;                   436-439                                        I     X   X
                                                                       Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                       individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125,
                The student will revise by clarifying connections      189, 255, 321, 387; The Writing Process,
LA.7.3.3.Su.b   between main idea and details with prompting;          436-439                                        I     X   X
                                                                       Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                       individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125,
                The student will revise by adding descriptive          189, 255, 321, 387; The Writing Process,
LA.7.3.3.Su.c   words or details; and                                  436-439                                        I     X   X
                                                                       Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                The student will revise by using tools, strategies,    individual needs: SE/TE: Writing
                and resources to improve the draft (e.g., teacher      Checklist, 63, 125, 189, 255, 321, 387;
LA.7.3.3.Su.d   or peer review, dictionary).                           Rubrics for Writing, 440-442                   I     X   X

                                                                Grade 7                                                             Page 53
SSS STANDARD/          STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                    PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT           DESCRIPTION                                              TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                      I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                        SE/TE: Revise, 63, 125, 189, 255, 321,
                       The student will adjust information communicated 387; The Writing Process, 436-439; Add’l
                       about persons and objects when necessary by      TE: Differentiated Instruction, 63, 125, 189,
LA.7.3.3.Pa.a          selecting different pictures, symbols, or words. 255, 321, 387                                      I     X

Editing for Language   Standard: The student will edit and correct the
Conventions            draft for standard language conventions.
                       The student will edit for correct use of spelling,   SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                       using spelling rules, orthographic patterns,         256, 322, 390; Spelling lessons will aid
                       generalizations, knowledge of root words,            students with this skill, for examples see:
                       prefixes, suffixes, and knowledge of Greek and       19, 49, 239, 281, 343
                       Latin root words and using a dictionary,
LA.7.3.4.1             thesaurus, or other resources as necessary;                                                         I     X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use                SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                       of capitalization, including regional names (e.g.,   256, 322, 390; Grammar Handbook:
LA.7.3.4.2             East Coast), historical events and documents;        Capitalization, 421-423                        I     X   X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Punctuation, 366; Edit and
                       The student will edit for correct use of punctuation Proofread, 64, 126, 190, 256, 322, 390;
                       of sentence structures, including participles and    Grammar Handbook, 416-421
                       participial phrases, colon in introductory lists and
                       to punctuate business letter salutations,
                       semicolon in compound sentences, dash for
                       additional emphasis or information, and
LA.7.3.4.3             apostrophes for plural possessives;                                                                 I     X   X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Grammar Focus, 14, 28, 44, 56,
                                                                            80, 92, 104, 118, 142, 1754, 170, 182,
                       The student will edit for correct use of the eight   208, 220, 234, 248, 276, 288, 300, 314,
                       parts of speech (noun, pronoun, verb, adverb,        338, 350, 366, 380; Edit and Proofread,
                       adjective, conjunction, preposition, interjection),  64, 126, 190, 256, 322, 390; Grammar
                       regular and irregular verbs, and pronoun             Handbook, Grammar Handbook, 406–423
LA.7.3.4.4             agreement; and                                                                                      I     X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of consistency SE/TE: Verb Tense, 56, 208, 220, 276;
                       in verb tense in simple, compound, and complex Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190, 256,
LA.7.3.4.5             sentences.                                           322, 390; Grammar Handbook, 409-410            I     X   X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                       The student will edit for correct use of spelling of 256, 322, 390; Spelling lessons will aid
                       high frequency and phonetically regular words,       students with this skill, for examples see:
LA.7.3.4.In.a          using a dictionary or other resource as necessary; 19, 49, 239, 281, 343                            I     X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of             SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                       capitalization, including proper nouns, the          256, 322, 390; Grammar Handbook:
                       pronoun “I,” days of the week, months of the year, Capitalization, 421-423
LA.7.3.4.In.b          and initial word of sentences;                                                                      I     X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                       The student will edit for correct use of commas in 256, 322, 390; Grammar Handbook, 416-
LA.7.3.4.In.c          dates and end punctuation for sentences; and         421                                            I     X   X



                                                                      Grade 7                                                            Page 54
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                             PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                      TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                         SE/TE: Sentences, 44; Verb Tense, 56,
                                                                         208, 220, 276; Edit and Proofread, 64,
                The student will edit for correct use of verb tense      126, 190, 256, 322, 390; Grammar
LA.7.3.4.In.d   and complete sentences.                                  Handbook, 409-410, 414-415                     I     X   X
                The student will edit for correct use of left to right   SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
LA.7.3.4.Su.a   progression and sequencing;                              256, 322, 390                                  I     X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                The student will edit for correct use of spelling of     256, 322, 390; Spelling lessons will aid
                common phonetically regular words (e.g., CVC,            students with this skill, for examples see:
                CVCe) and high frequency words, using a word             19, 49, 239, 281, 343
LA.7.3.4.Su.b   bank, dictionary, or other resource as necessary;                                                       I     X   X
                The student will edit for correct use of             SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                capitalization, including proper nouns, the          256, 322, 390; Grammar Handbook:
LA.7.3.4.Su.c   pronoun “I,” and the initial word of sentences;      Capitalization, 421-423                            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 126, 190,
                The student will edit for correct use of end         256, 322, 390; Grammar Handbook, 415,
LA.7.3.4.Su.d   punctuation (period) for sentences; and              416-421                                            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Sentences, 44; Edit and Proofread,
                The student will edit for correct use of complete    64, 126, 190, 256, 322, 390; Grammar
LA.7.3.4.Su.e   sentences.                                           Handbook, 414-415                                  I     X   X
                                                                     For related material see: SE/TE: Edit and
                The student will adjust information communicated Proofread, 64, 126, 190, 256, 322, 390
                about persons and objects when necessary by
LA.7.3.4.Pa.a   selecting different pictures, symbols, or words.                                                        I     X
                Standard: The student will write a final
Publishing      product for the intended audience.
                The student will prepare writing using technology SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
                in a format appropriate to audience and purpose 391; The Writing Process, 436-439; How
LA.7.3.5.1      (e.g., manuscript, multimedia);                      to Use Technology in Writing, 455                  I     X   X   X
                                                                     For related information see: SE/TE:
                                                                     Advertisement, 209; Letter, 43, 119, 219,
                                                                     221; Instructions, 289; Making Charts, 13,
                The student will use elements of spacing and         153, 169, 180; Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257,
                design for graphics (e.g., tables, drawings, charts, 323, 391; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                graphs) when applicable to enhance the               Writing Letters, 443-444; How to Use
LA.7.3.5.2      appearance of the document; and                      Graphic Organizers, 432                            I     X   X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
                                                                         391; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                                                                         Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 81, 93,
                                                                         105, 119, 143, 155, 171, 183, 209, 221,
                The student will share the writing with the              235, 249, 277, 289, 301, 315, 339, 351,
LA.7.3.5.3      intended audience.                                       367, 381                                       I     X   X   X
                The student will prepare writing in a format             SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
LA.7.3.5.In.a   appropriate to audience and purpose;                     391; The Writing Process, 436-439              I     X   X




                                                                  Grade 7                                                             Page 55
SSS STANDARD/                   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                     PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT                    DESCRIPTION                                               TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                      I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                                  For related information see: SE/TE:
                                                                                  Advertisement, 209; Letter, 43, 119, 219,
                                                                                  221; Instructions, 289; Making Charts, 13,
                                                                                  153, 169, 180; Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257,
                                The student will use required spacing and         323, 391; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                                margins and graphics and illustrations as needed; Writing Letters, 443-444; How to Use
LA.7.3.5.In.b                   and                                               Graphic Organizers, 432                            I     X   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
                                                                                     391; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                                                                                     Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 81, 93,
                                                                                     105, 119, 143, 155, 171, 183, 209, 221,
                                The student will share writing with the intended     235, 249, 277, 289, 301, 315, 339, 351,
LA.7.3.5.In.c                   audience.                                            367, 381                                        I     X   X
                                The student will prepare writing appropriate to the SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
LA.7.3.5.Su.a                   purpose;                                            391; The Writing Process, 436-439                I     X   X
                                                                                    For related information see: SE/TE:
                                                                                    Advertisement, 209; Letter, 43, 119, 219,
                                                                                    221; Instructions, 289; Making Charts, 13,
                                                                                    153, 169, 180; Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257,
                                                                                    323, 391; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                                The student will use required spacing and           Writing Letters, 443-444; How to Use
LA.7.3.5.Su.b                   graphics or illustrations as needed; and            Graphic Organizers, 432                          I     X   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
                                                                                     391; The Writing Process, 436-439;
                                                                                     Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 81, 93,
                                                                                     105, 119, 143, 155, 171, 183, 209, 221,
                                The student will share writing with the intended     235, 249, 277, 289, 301, 315, 339, 351,
LA.7.3.5.Su.c                   audience.                                            367, 381                                        I     X   X
                                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Writing Activities,
                                The student will effectively communicate             15, 29, 45, 57, 63, 81, 93, 105, 119, 125,
                                information about familiar persons, objects,         143, 155, 171, 183, 189, 209, 221, 235,
                                activities, or events, using pictures, symbols, or   249, 255, 277, 289, 301, 315, 321, 339,
LA.7.3.5.Pa.a                   words.                                               351, 367, 381, 387                              I     X

Grade 7: Writing Applications
                                Standard: The student develops and
Creative                        demonstrates creative writing.




                                                                                Grade 7                                                            Page 56
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                      SE/TE: Fictional Narrative, 124–127;
                The student will write narrative accounts with an
                                                                      Personal Letter, 119; Personal Narrative,
                engaging plot (including rising action, conflict,
                                                                      93; Story Starter, 105; Story, 81
                suspense, climax, falling action, and resolution),
                and that use a range of appropriate strategies and
                specific narrative action (e.g., dialogue,
                movement, gestures, expressions) and include
                effectively developed and complex characters, a
                clearly described setting, figurative language, and
                descriptive words or phrases to enhance style and
LA.7.4.1.1      tone; and                                                                                          I     X   X   X
                The student will write a variety of expressive        SE/TE: Writing poem or making picture
                forms (e.g., realistic fiction, one-act play,         about dreams, 247; Write a Poem, 59, 251,
                suspense story, poetry) that according to the type    317; Write Journal Entry, 121; Write
                of writing employed, incorporate figurative           Dialogue, 121, 251; Poster, 59, 121, 251,
                language, rhythm, dialogue, characterization, plot,   383; Write a Myth, 383
LA.7.4.1.2      and appropriate format.                                                                            I     X   X   X
                The student will write narratives about events or     SE/TE: Fictional Narrative, 124–127;
                experiences that include a main idea, descriptive     Personal Letter, 119; Personal Narrative,
                details, characters, sequence of events, setting,     93; Story Starter, 105; Story, 81
LA.7.4.1.In.a   and plot; and                                                                                      I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Writing poem or making picture
                The student will produce expressive forms (e.g.,      about dreams, 247; Write a Poem, 59, 251,
                poems, skits, songs) that include rhythm and          317; Write Journal Entry, 121; Write
                rhyme, dialogue, appropriate format, and              Dialogue, 121, 251; Poster, 59, 121, 251,
LA.7.4.1.In.b   figurative language.                                  383; Write a Myth, 383                       I     X   X
                The student will write narratives about events or  SE/TE: Fictional Narrative, 124–127;
                experiences that include a main idea, characters, Personal Letter, 119; Personal Narrative,
LA.7.4.1.Su.a   and sequence of events; and                        93; Story Starter, 105; Story, 81               I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Writing poem or making picture
                The student will contribute to group writing of    about dreams, 247; Write a Poem, 59, 251,
                expressive forms (e.g., poems, skits) using        317; Write Journal Entry, 121; Write
                predictable patterns of rhythm and rhyme and       Dialogue, 121, 251; Poster, 59, 121, 251,
LA.7.4.1.Su.b   dialogue.                                          383; Write a Myth, 383                          I     X   X
                The student will communicate information that      SE/TE: Fictional Narrative, 124–127;
                tells about familiar persons, objects, and events; Personal Letter, 119; Personal Narrative,
LA.7.4.1.Pa.a   and                                                93; Story Starter, 105; Story, 81               I     X
                                                                   SE/TE: Writing poem or making picture
                                                                   about dreams, 247; Write a Poem, 59, 251,
                The student will recognize rhythm, sounds, and     317; Write Journal Entry, 121; Write
                words in familiar poetry, dialogue, songs, and     Dialogue, 121, 251; Poster, 59, 121, 251,
LA.7.4.1.Pa.b   rhymes.                                            383; Write a Myth, 383                          I     X

                Standard: The student develops and
                demonstrates expository writing that provides
Informative     information related to real-world tasks.



                                                              Grade 7                                                            Page 57
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                             PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                       TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                         SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause and
                                                                         Effect, 277; Classifying Paragraph, 315;
                                                                         Compare and Contrast, 143; Critique, 171;
                                                                         Instructions, 289; Instructional Essay,
                The student will write in a variety of                   320–323; News Article, 183, 188–191;
                informational/expository forms (e.g., summaries,         Problem and Solution, 155; Summary, 301;
                procedures, instructions, experiments, rubrics,          Descriptive Writing, 15, 29, 45, 57, 62–65
LA.7.4.2.1      how-to manuals, assembly instructions);                                                                I     X   X   X
                                                                     For related informatoin see: SE/TE: How
                The student will record information (e.g.,           to Use Graphic Organizers, 432; Graphic
                observations, notes, lists, charts, legends) related Organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57, 62, 81, 93, 105,
                to a topic, including visual aids to organize and    119, 124, 143, 155, 171, 183, 188, 209,
                record information, as appropriate, and attribute    221, 235, 249, 254, 277, 289, 301, 315,
LA.7.4.2.2      sources of information;                              320, 339, 351, 367, 381, 386                      I     X   X   X
                The student will write specialized                  SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause and
                informational/expository essays (e.g., process,     Effect, 277; Classifying Paragraph, 315;
                description, explanation, comparison/contrast,      Compare and Contrast, 143; Critique, 171;
                problem/solution) that include a thesis statement, Instructions, 289; Instructional Essay,
                supporting details, an organizational structure     320–323; News Article, 183, 188–191;
                particular to its type, and introductory, body, and Problem and Solution, 155; Summary, 301
LA.7.4.2.3      concluding paragraphs;                                                                                 I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Personal Letter, 119; Writing
                The student will write a variety of informal        Thank-you Letters, 43; Writing Letters to
                communications (e.g., friendly letters, thank-you   Editor, 219, 221; Writing Letters, 443–444
                notes, messages) and formal communications
                (e.g., conventional business letters, invitations)
                that follow a format and that have a clearly stated
                purpose and that include the date, proper
LA.7.4.2.4      salutation, body, closing and signature; and                                                           I     X   X   X
                The student will write detailed directions to       For related informatoin see: SE/TE:
                unfamiliar locations using cardinal and ordinal     Instructions, 289; Instructional Essay,
                directions, landmarks, streets, and distances, and 320–323; Add’l TE: Map, T35, T285
LA.7.4.2.5      create an accompanying map.                                                                            I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause and
                                                                    Effect, 277; Classifying Paragraph, 315;
                                                                    Compare and Contrast, 143; Critique, 171;
                                                                    Instructions, 289; Instructional Essay,
                                                                    320–323; News Article, 183, 188–191;
                                                                    Problem and Solution, 155; Summary, 301;
                The student will write in a variety of expository   Descriptive Writing, 15, 29, 45, 57, 62–65
LA.7.4.2.In.a   forms (e.g., journal, log, article, brief report);                                                     I     X   X




                                                                     Grade 7                                                         Page 58
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                            PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                     TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                        For related informatoin see: SE/TE: How
                                                                        to Use Graphic Organizers, 432; Graphic
                                                                        Organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57, 62, 81, 93, 105,
                The student will record information (e.g.,              119, 124, 143, 155, 171, 183, 188, 209,
                observations, notes, lists, labels, charts, graphs)     221, 235, 249, 254, 277, 289, 301, 315,
LA.7.4.2.In.b   related to a topic;                                     320, 339, 351, 367, 381, 386                    I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause and
                                                                     Effect, 277; Classifying Paragraph, 315;
                                                                     Compare and Contrast, 143; Critique, 171;
                                                                     Instructions, 289; Instructional Essay,
                The student will write an expository paragraph       320–323; News Article, 183, 188–191;
                that includes a topic sentence, supporting details, Problem and Solution, 155; Summary, 301
LA.7.4.2.In.c   and relevant information;                                                                               I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Personal Letter, 119; Writing
                The student will compose a friendly letter,          Thank-you Letters, 43; Writing Letters to
                message, invitation, and thank-you note and write Editor, 219, 221; Writing Letters, 443–444
LA.7.4.2.In.d   a formal letter using a model; and                                                                      I     X   X
                The student will write functional text (e.g., three- SE/TE: Instructions, 289; Instructional
                step instructions or directions, recipes, labels,    Essay, 320–323
LA.7.4.2.In.e   posters, graphs).                                                                                       I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause and
                                                                     Effect, 277; Classifying Paragraph, 315;
                                                                     Compare and Contrast, 143; Critique, 171;
                                                                     Instructions, 289; Instructional Essay,
                                                                     320–323; News Article, 183, 188–191;
                                                                     Problem and Solution, 155; Summary, 301;
                The student will write in a variety of expository    Descriptive Writing, 15, 29, 45, 57, 62–65
LA.7.4.2.Su.a   forms (e.g., daily journal, log, summary);                                                              I     X   X
                                                                        For related informatoin see: SE/TE: How
                                                                        to Use Graphic Organizers, 432; Graphic
                                                                        Organizers, 15, 29, 45, 57, 62, 81, 93, 105,
                                                                        119, 124, 143, 155, 171, 183, 188, 209,
                The student will record information (e.g., lists,       221, 235, 249, 254, 277, 289, 301, 315,
LA.7.4.2.Su.b   labels, charts) related to a topic;                     320, 339, 351, 367, 381, 386                    I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Expository Writing: Cause and
                                                                     Effect, 277; Classifying Paragraph, 315;
                                                                     Compare and Contrast, 143; Critique, 171;
                                                                     Instructions, 289; Instructional Essay,
                The student will write expository text that includes 320–323; News Article, 183, 188–191;
                a topic sentence and relevant information about      Problem and Solution, 155; Summary, 301
LA.7.4.2.Su.c   the topic;                                                                                              I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Personal Letter, 119; Writing
                The student will compose invitations, messages, Thank-you Letters, 43
LA.7.4.2.Su.d   and thank-you notes using a model; and                                                                  I     X   X




                                                                    Grade 7                                                           Page 59
SSS STANDARD/            STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT             DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                         The student will write functional text (e.g., two-    SE/TE: Instructions, 289; Instructional
                         step directions, basic recipes, informational         Essay, 320–323
LA.7.4.2.Su.e            posters).                                                                                            I     X   X
                                                                             SE/TE: Extension and Response to
                         The student will communicate information about      Literature, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79, 91, 103, 117,
                         the persons, objects, or activities using pictures, 141, 153, 169, 181, 207, 219, 247, 275,
LA.7.4.2.Pa.a            symbols, or words;                                  287, 299, 313, 337, 349, 365, 379                I     X
                                                                             SE/TE: Extension and Response to
                                                                             Literature, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79, 91, 103, 117,
                         The student will communicate information about      141, 153, 169, 181, 207, 219, 247, 275,
LA.7.4.2.Pa.b            classroom activities;                               287, 299, 313, 337, 349, 365, 379                I     X
                                                                             SE/TE: Discussion, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79, 91,
                         The student will use gestures and expressions to 103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181, 207, 219,
                         greet or invite others to engage in an activity or  247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337, 349, 365,
LA.7.4.2.Pa.c            communicate appreciation; and                       379                                              I     X
                                                                             For related material see: SE/TE: In Your
                                                                             Own Words, 26, 54, 90, 102, 140, 206,
LA.7.4.2.Pa.d            The student will express preferences and choices. 232, 286, 298, 348, 378                            I     X

                         Standard: The student develops and
                         demonstrates persuasive writing that is used
Persuasive               for the purpose of influencing the reader.
                         The student will write persuasive text (e.g.,         SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                         advertisement, speech, essay, public service          209; ask questions, 235; essay, 254–257;
                         announcement) that establish and develop a            letter to the editor, 221; review, 249;
                         controlling idea and supporting arguments for the     Modes of Writing, 433-435
                         validity of the proposed idea with detailed
LA.7.4.3.1               evidence; and                                                                                        I     X   X   X
                         The student will include persuasive techniques        SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                         (e.g., word choice, repetition, emotional appeal,     209; essay, 254–257
                         hyperbole, appeal to authority, celebrity
LA.7.4.3.2               endorsement, rhetorical question, irony).                                                            I     X   X   X
                         The student select a favorite topic or activity and  SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                         write persuasive text (e.g., advertisement,          209; ask questions, 235; essay, 254–257;
                         message, paragraph) that shows why the topic or      letter to the editor, 221; review, 249;
LA.7.4.3.In.a            activity is important.                               Modes of Writing, 433-435                       I     X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                         The student will communicate preferences or          209; ask questions, 235; essay, 254–257;
                         feelings about familiar persons, objects, or actions letter to the editor, 221; review, 249;
LA.7.4.3.Su.a            in a variety of daily activities.                    Modes of Writing, 433-435                       I     X   X
                                                                              Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                         The student will communicate preferences or          individual needs: SE/TE: Persuasive
                         feelings about familiar persons, objects, or actions Writing: advertisement, 209; letter to the
LA.7.4.3.Pa.a            in a variety of daily activities.                    editor, 221; review, 249                        I     X
Grade 7: Communication



                                                                          Grade 7                                                           Page 60
SSS STANDARD/            STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT             DESCRIPTION                                              TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                     I/M*   B   I   A
                         Standard: The student engages in the writing
                         process and writes to communicate ideas and
Penmanship               experiences.
                                                                             Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                             provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                             Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 63, 81,
                                                                             93, 105, 119, 125, 143, 155, 171, 183,
                                                                             189, 209, 221, 235, 249, 255, 277, 289,
                         The student will use fluent and legible handwriting 301, 315, 321, 339, 351, 367, 381, 387
LA.7.5.1.1               skills.                                                                                            I     X   X   X
                                                                             Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                             provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                             Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 63, 81,
                                                                             93, 105, 119, 125, 143, 155, 171, 183,
                                                                             189, 209, 221, 235, 249, 255, 277, 289,
                                                                             301, 315, 321, 339, 351, 367, 381, 387
LA.7.5.1.In.a            The student will use legible handwriting.                                                          I     X   X
                                                                            Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                            provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                            Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 63, 81,
                                                                            93, 105, 119, 125, 143, 155, 171, 183,
                                                                            189, 209, 221, 235, 249, 255, 277, 289,
                         The student will write words and sentences with    301, 315, 321, 339, 351, 367, 381, 387
LA.7.5.1.Su.a            proper spacing and sequencing.                                                                     I     X   X
                                                                            Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                            provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                            Writing Activities, 15, 29, 45, 57, 63, 81,
                                                                            93, 105, 119, 125, 143, 155, 171, 183,
                                                                            189, 209, 221, 235, 249, 255, 277, 289,
                         The student will use pictures, symbols, or words   301, 315, 321, 339, 351, 367, 381, 387
LA.7.5.1.Pa.a            to communicate meaning.                                                                            I     X
                         Standard: The student effectively applies
Listening and Speaking   listening and speaking strategies.
                                                                             SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                             60–61, 122–123, 186–187, 252–253,
                                                                             318–319,384–385; In Your Own Words,
                                                                             26, 54, 90, 102, 140, 206, 232, 286, 298,
                                                                             348, 378; Discussion, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79,
                                                                             91, 103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181, 207,
                                                                             219, 247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337, 349,
                                                                             365, 379; Add’l TE: Listen and Read, T8,
                         The student will use effective listening strategies
                                                                             T20, T34, T50, T74, T86, T98, T110, T136,
                         for informal and formal discussions, connecting to
                                                                             T148, T160, T176, T200, T214, T226,
                         and building on the ideas of a previous speaker
                                                                             T240, T266, T282, T294, T306, T332,
                         and respecting the viewpoints of others when
                                                                             T344, T372
LA.7.5.2.1               identifying bias or faulty logic;                                                                  I     X   X   X



                                                                      Grade 7                                                             Page 61
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                    For related information see: SE/TE:
                The student will analyze persuasive techniques in Speech, 252–253; Think of
LA.7.5.2.2      both formal and informal speech; and                Counterargument, 253                            I     X   X   X
                The student will organize and effectively deliver   SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                speeches to entertain, inform and persuade,         60–61, 122–123, 186–187, 252–253,
                demonstrating appropriate language choices,         318–319,384–385; In Your Own Words,
                body language, eye contact, gestures, and the       26, 54, 90, 102, 140, 206, 232, 286, 298,
LA.7.5.2.3      use of supporting graphics and technology.          348, 378                                        I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                    60–61, 122–123, 186–187, 252–253,
                                                                    318–319,384–385; In Your Own Words,
                                                                    26, 54, 90, 102, 140, 206, 232, 286, 298,
                The student will use effective listening strategies 348, 378; Discussion, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79,
                for informal discussions, including but not limited 91, 103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181, 207,
                to responsive listening, staying on topic, and      219, 247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337, 349,
LA.7.5.2.In.a   respecting the viewpoints of others;                365, 379                                        I     X   X
                The student will identify examples of persuasive      For related information see: SE/TE:
                techniques (e.g., word choice, emotional appeal,      Speech, 252–253; Think of
LA.7.5.2.In.b   appeal to authority); and                             Counterargument, 253                          I     X   X
                The student will give brief speeches to inform        SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                using appropriate language choices, eye contact,      60–61, 122–123, 186–187, 252–253,
LA.7.5.2.In.c   and body language.                                    318–319,384–385                               I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Discussion, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79, 91,
                The student will use effective listening strategies   103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181, 207, 219,
                for informal discussions, including but not limited   247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337, 349, 365,
                to paying attention, asking questions, making         379
LA.7.5.2.Su.a   relevant comments, and respecting others;                                                           I     X   X
                The student will identify examples of persuasive      For related information see: SE/TE:
                techniques (e.g., emotional appeal, appeal to         Speech, 252–253; Think of
LA.7.5.2.Su.b   authority); and                                       Counterargument, 253                          I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                      60–61, 122–123, 186–187, 252–253,
                The student will give informal oral presentations     318–319,384–385; In Your Own Words,
                about topics or experiences using appropriate         26, 54, 90, 102, 140, 206, 232, 286, 298,
LA.7.5.2.Su.c   language choices and body language.                   348, 378                                      I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Discussion, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79, 91,
                                                                      103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181, 207, 219,
                                                                      247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337, 349, 365,
                                                                      379; In Your Own Words, 26, 54, 90, 102,
                The student will listen and respond to verbal         140, 206, 232, 286, 298, 348, 378
LA.7.5.2.Pa.a   messages from familiar speakers;                                                                    I     X
                The student will respond purposefully to         For related information see: SE/TE:
                persuasive communication from a familiar person; Speech, 252–253
LA.7.5.2.Pa.b   and                                                                                                 I     X




                                                               Grade 7                                                            Page 62
SSS STANDARD/                   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT                    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                                      SE/TE: Discussion, 13, 27, 43, 55, 79, 91,
                                                                                      103, 117, 141, 153, 169, 181, 207, 219,
                                                                                      247, 275, 287, 299, 313, 337, 349, 365,
                                                                                      379; In Your Own Words, 26, 54, 90, 102,
                             The student will use language to express                 140, 206, 232, 286, 298, 348, 378
LA.7.5.2.Pa.c                information or preferences in a variety of activities.                                                 I     X
Grade 7: Information and Media Literacy
                             Standard: The student comprehends the wide
                             array of informational text that is part of our
Informational Text           day to day experiences.
                                                                                      SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                                      visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                                      Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                                      Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                                      Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                                                                      Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                                                                      Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
                                                                                      451–455; also see: science text, 20–25,
                                                                                      50–53, 98–101, 176–179, 200¬, 372–377;
                                                                                      social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                                                                      226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                                The student will explain how text features (e.g.,
                                                                                      Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                                charts, maps, diagrams, sub-headings, captions,
                                                                                      T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                                illustrations, graphs) aid the reader's
                                                                                      T324, T326, T392
LA.7.6.1.1                      understanding;                                                                                      I     X   X   X
                                                                                    SE/TE: Science Text, 20–25, 50–53,
                                                                                    98–101, 176–179, 200--205,372–377;
                                The student will use information from a variety of Social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                                consumer (e.g., warranties, instructional           226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                                manuals), workplace (e.g., applications, contracts) Filling in Forms, 445-446; Add’l TE:
                                and other documents to explain a situation and      Reference Books, T25; Cookbooks, T39,
LA.7.6.1.2                      justify a decision; and                             T113                                            I     X   X   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Instructions, 289; Instructional
                                The student will create a technical manual or        Essay, 320–323; Problem and Solution,
LA.7.6.1.3                      solve a problem.                                     155                                            I     X   X   X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                                     visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                                     Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                                     Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                                     Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                                The student will locate information in text features Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                                (e.g., table of contents, headings, simple charts    Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
LA.7.6.1.In.a                   and maps, text styles, glossary); and                451–455                                        I     X   X




                                                                              Grade 7                                                             Page 63
SSS STANDARD/      STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                             PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT       DESCRIPTION                                                      TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                            SE/TE: Science Text, 20–25, 50–53,
                                                                            98–101, 176–179, 200--205,372–377;
                                                                            Social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                   The student will use sources of information (e.g., 226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                   consumer, workplace, other real-world situations) Filling in Forms, 445-446; Add’l TE:
                   to follow instructions and procedures, solve             Reference Books, T25; Cookbooks, T39,
LA.7.6.1.In.b      problems, and make decisions.                            T113                                           I     X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 19; use
                                                                            visuals, 85; scan, 199; How to Use
                                                                            Reference Books, 400–401; Skills and
                                                                            Learning Strategies, 404; Maps and
                                                                            Diagrams, 428–429; Graphs, 430–431;
                   The student will identify information in text            Graphic Organizers, 432; Conducting
                   features (e.g., illustrations, title, table of contents, Research, 447; Technology Handbook,
LA.7.6.1.Su.a      headings); and                                           451–455                                        I     X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Science Text, 20–25, 50–53,
                                                                         98–101, 176–179, 200--205,372–377;
                                                                         Social studies text, 86–89, 136–139,
                   The student will use easy-to-read informational       226–231, 282–285, 294–297, 344–347;
                   materials (e.g., consumer, workplace, other real-     Filling in Forms, 445-446; Add’l TE:
                   world situations) with graphics to follow             Reference Books, T25; Cookbooks, T39,
LA.7.6.1.Su.b      instructions, solve problems, and perform tasks.      T113                                              I     X   X
                   The student will use familiar pictures, symbols, or Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                   words to complete tasks in classroom or school      T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
LA.7.6.1.Pa.a      activities.                                         T324, T326, T392                                    I     X
                   Standard: The student uses a systematic
                   process for collecting, processing, and
Research Process   presenting information.
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                                                                       Research Report, 386–391; Write a
                                                                       Report, 383; Research Activities, 55, 60,
                                                                       79, 91, 141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349;
                                                                       Conducting Research, 447; How to Use
                                                                       the Internet for Research, 452; How to
                   The student will select a topic, develop a
                                                                       Evaluate the Quality of Information, 453
                   prioritized search plan, and apply evaluative
                   criteria (e.g., relevance, objectivity, scope of    Add’l TE: Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115,
                   content in print and online sources) to select      T161, T165, T167, T177, T203, T273,
LA.7.6.2.1         appropriate resources for research;                 T295, T333, T361, T373                              I     X   X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Research Activities, 55, 60, 79, 91,
                                                                            141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349; Conducting
                                                                            Research, 447; How to Use the Internet for
                   The student will assess organize and check the           Research, 452; How to Evaluate the
                   validity and reliability of information in text, using a Quality of Information, 453 Add’l TE:
                   variety of techniques by examining several               Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115, T161, T165,
                   sources of information, including both primary and T167, T177, T203, T273, T295, T333,
LA.7.6.2.2         secondary sources;                                       T361, T373                                     I     X   X   X

                                                                   Grade 7                                                               Page 64
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                      SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                The student will write an informational report that   Research Report, 386–391; Write a
                includes a focused topic, appropriate facts and       Report, 383
                relevant details, a logical sequence, a concluding
LA.7.6.2.3      statement, and a list of sources used; and                                                           I     X   X   X
                The student will understand the importance of          SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 367;
                legal and ethical practices, including laws            Research Report, 386–391; Citing
                regarding libel, slander, copyright, and plagiarism Sources, 449-450
                in the use of mass media and digital sources,
                know the associated consequences, and comply
LA.7.6.2.4      with the law.                                                                                        I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                                                                       Research Report, 386–391; Write a
                                                                       Report, 383; Research Activities, 55, 60,
                                                                       79, 91, 141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349;
                                                                       Conducting Research, 447; How to Use
                                                                       the Internet for Research, 452; How to
                                                                       Evaluate the Quality of Information, 453
                The student will identify a topic for inquiry and use
                a predetermined search plan and evaluative             Add’l TE: Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115,
                criteria (e.g., relevance, special features) to select T161, T165, T167, T177, T203, T273,
LA.7.6.2.In.a   references and other resources;                        T295, T333, T361, T373                        I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Research Activities, 55, 60, 79, 91,
                                                                      141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349; Conducting
                                                                      Research, 447; How to Use the Internet for
                                                                      Research, 452; How to Evaluate the
                The student will locate and use information and       Quality of Information, 453 Add’l TE:
                determine whether content in informational            Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115, T161, T165,
                materials is accurate by matching to a reliable       T167, T177, T203, T273, T295, T333,
LA.7.6.2.In.b   source;                                               T361, T373                                     I     X   X
                The student will write a report that includes a title, SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                main idea(s) and relevant details in an organized Research Report, 386–391; Write a
                sequence, a closing statement, and a list of           Report, 383
LA.7.6.2.In.c   sources used; and                                                                                    I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 367;
                The student will record simple bibliographic data Research Report, 386–391; Citing
                and identify ethical practices for using information Sources, 449-450
LA.7.6.2.In.d   (e.g., not claiming ownership of others’ ideas).                                                     I     X   X




                                                               Grade 7                                                             Page 65
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                   SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                                                                   Research Report, 386–391; Write a
                                                                   Report, 383; Research Activities, 55, 60,
                                                                   79, 91, 141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349;
                                                                   Conducting Research, 447; How to Use
                                                                   the Internet for Research, 452; How to
                                                                   Evaluate the Quality of Information, 453
                The student will select a topic and use a
                predetermined search plan to locate information in Add’l TE: Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115,
                teacher-recommended digital or print references T161, T165, T167, T177, T203, T273,
LA.7.6.2.Su.a   or other sources;                                  T295, T333, T361, T373                          I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Research Activities, 55, 60, 79, 91,
                                                                    141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349; Conducting
                                                                    Research, 447; How to Use the Internet for
                                                                    Research, 452; How to Evaluate the
                                                                    Quality of Information, 453 Add’l TE:
                The student will use references or other sources    Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115, T161, T165,
                to identify relevant information to answer search   T167, T177, T203, T273, T295, T333,
LA.7.6.2.Su.b   questions;                                          T361, T373                                     I     X   X
                The student will write a simple report supported by SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                relevant illustrations and graphics with a title, and Research Report, 386–391; Write a
LA.7.6.2.Su.c   a list of sources used; and                           Report, 383                                  I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 367;
                The student will record the titles of references or Research Report, 386–391; Citing
                other sources used to answer search questions         Sources, 449-450
                and identify ethical practices for using information
LA.7.6.2.Su.d   (e.g., not copying from another student).                                                          I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                                                                      Research Report, 386–391; Write a
                                                                      Report, 383; Research Activities, 55, 60,
                                                                      79, 91, 141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349;
                                                                      Conducting Research, 447; How to Use
                                                                      the Internet for Research, 452; How to
                                                                      Evaluate the Quality of Information, 453
                The student will select a person, object, or activity Add’l TE: Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115,
                to learn about and use a teacher-recommended          T161, T165, T167, T177, T203, T273,
LA.7.6.2.Pa.a   source for information;                               T295, T333, T361, T373                       I     X
                                                                    SE/TE: Research Activities, 55, 60, 79, 91,
                                                                    141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349; Conducting
                                                                    Research, 447; How to Use the Internet for
                                                                    Research, 452; How to Evaluate the
                The student will obtain information about the       Quality of Information, 453 Add’l TE:
                selected person, object, or activity and seek       Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115, T161, T165,
                assistance to clarify meaning of pictures, symbols, T167, T177, T203, T273, T295, T333,
LA.7.6.2.Pa.b   or words;                                           T361, T373                                     I     X




                                                              Grade 7                                                            Page 66
SSS STANDARD/    STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT     DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                 The student will communicate information about        SE/TE: Research Writing, 339, 351, 381;
                 the selected person or object using pictures,         Research Report, 386–391; Write a
LA.7.6.2.Pa.c    symbols, or words; and                                Report, 383                                    I     X
                                                                       SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 367;
                 The student will identify objects, books, and print   Research Report, 386–391; Citing
LA.7.6.2.Pa.d    materials that belong to others.                      Sources, 449-450                               I     X
                 Standard: The student develops and
                 demonstrates an understanding of media
                 literacy as a life skill that is integral to
Media Literacy   informed decision making.
                                                                       SE/TE: Poster, 59, 121, 251, 383; Make a
                                                                       Map, 317; Artwork, 317; Travel Brochure,
                                                                       121; Viewing and Representing, 428-432;
                                                                       How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                                                                       453; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66,
                                                                       T68, T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                 The student will analyze ways that production         T324, T326, T392. A Video Program
                 elements (e.g.,, graphics, color, motion, sound,      DVD features background information
                 digital technology) affect communication across       about the theme.
LA.7.6.3.1       the media;                                                                                           I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Poster, 59, 121, 251, 383; Make a
                                                                       Map, 317; Artwork, 317; Travel Brochure,
                 The student will demonstrate ability to select and    121; Viewing and Representing, 428-432;
                 ethically use media appropriate for the purpose,      How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
LA.7.6.3.2       occasion, and audience; and                           453                                            I     X   X   X
                 The student will distinguish between propaganda       SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 428;
                 and ethical reasoning strategies in print and         Think of Counterargument, 253
LA.7.6.3.3       nonprint media.                                                                                      I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Poster, 59, 121, 251, 383; Make a
                                                                    Map, 317; Artwork, 317; Travel Brochure,
                                                                    121; Viewing and Representing, 428-432;
                                                                    How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                                                                    453; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66,
                                                                    T68, T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                                                                    T324, T326, T392. A Video Program
                 The student will identify how production elements DVD features background information
                 (e.g., graphics, color, sound) are used to enhance about the theme.
LA.7.6.3.In.a    communication in media;                                                                              I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Poster, 59, 121, 251, 383; Make a
                                                                    Map, 317; Artwork, 317; Travel Brochure,
                                                                    121; Viewing and Representing, 428-432;
                 The student will select and use media to enhance How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
LA.7.6.3.In.b    communication; and                                 453                                               I     X   X
                 The student will recognize persuasive techniques SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 428;
                 (e.g., word choice, emotional appeal, appeal to  Think of Counterargument, 253
LA.7.6.3.In.c    authority) in text.                                                                                  I     X   X

                                                                Grade 7                                                             Page 67
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                    SE/TE: Poster, 59, 121, 251, 383; Make a
                                                                    Map, 317; Artwork, 317; Travel Brochure,
                                                                    121; Viewing and Representing, 428-432;
                                                                    How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                                                                    453; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66,
                                                                    T68, T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                                                                    T324, T326, T392. A Video Program
                                                                    DVD features background information
                The student will recognize production elements      about the theme.
LA.7.6.3.Su.a   (e.g., motion, sound, color) used in media;                                                         I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Poster, 59, 121, 251, 383; Make a
                                                                    Map, 317; Artwork, 317; Travel Brochure,
                                                                    121; Viewing and Representing, 428-432;
                The student will use media to enhance               How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
LA.7.6.3.Su.b   communication; and                                  453                                             I     X   X
                The student will recognize examples of basic        SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 428;
                persuasive techniques (e.g., emotional appeal,      Think of Counterargument, 253
LA.7.6.3.Su.c   appeal to authority).                                                                               I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Poster, 59, 121, 251, 383; Make a
                                                                    Map, 317; Artwork, 317; Travel Brochure,
                                                                    121; Viewing and Representing, 428-432;
                                                                    How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                                                                    453; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66,
                                                                    T68, T128, T130, T192, T194, T258, T260,
                                                                    T324, T326, T392. A Video Program
                                                                    DVD features background information
                The student will respond to production elements     about the theme.
LA.7.6.3.Pa.a   (e.g., sound, color, motion) used in media; and                                                     I     X
                                                                    Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                    individual needs: SE/TE: Viewing and
                                                                    Representing, 428-432; How to Evaluate
LA.7.6.3.Pa.b   The student will use media to obtain information.   the Quality of Information, 453                 I     X
                Standard: The student develops the essential
                technology skills for using and understanding
                conventional and current tools, materials and
Technology      processes.
                                                                    SE/TE: Internet Use, 55, 60, 79, 91, 141,
                                                                    185, 207, 233, 317, 349; Technology
                                                                    Handbook, 451-455; Add’l TE: Study
                                                                    Skills: Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115, T161,
                The student will select and use appropriate         T165, T167, T177, T203, T273, T295,
                available technologies (e.g., computer, digital     T333, T361, T373; A Video Program DVD
                camera) to enhance communication and achieve        features background information about the
LA.7.6.4.1      a purpose (e.g., video, presentations); and         theme.                                          I     X   X   X




                                                             Grade 7                                                              Page 68
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                     PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will evaluate and apply digital tools SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
                (e.g., word processing, multimedia authoring, web 391; Technology Handbook, 451-455
                tools, graphic organizers) to publications and
LA.7.6.4.2      presentations.                                                                                      I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Internet Use, 55, 60, 79, 91, 141,
                                                                  185, 207, 233, 317, 349; Technology
                                                                  Handbook, 451-455; Add’l TE: Study
                                                                  Skills: Internet, T9, T87, T101, T115, T161,
                The student will use appropriate available        T165, T167, T177, T203, T273, T295,
LA.7.6.4.In.a   technologies to enhance communication; and        T333, T361, T373                                  I     X   X
                The student will use digital tools and media to       SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
LA.7.6.4.In.b   present a topic or story.                             391; Technology Handbook, 451-455             I     X   X
                The student will use appropriate available            SE/TE: Internet Use, 55, 60, 79, 91, 141,
LA.7.6.4.Su.a   technologies to enhance communication; and            185, 207, 233, 317, 349                       I     X   X
                The student will use digital tools and media to       SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127, 191, 257, 323,
LA.7.6.4.Su.b   present a topic or story.                             391; Technology Handbook, 451-455             I     X   X
                                                                      Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                      individual needs: SE/TE: Internet Use, 55,
                The student will use an appropriate available         60, 79, 91, 141, 185, 207, 233, 317, 349
LA.7.6.4.Pa.a   technology to enhance communication; and                                                            I     X
                                                                      Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                      individual needs: SE/TE: Publish, 65, 127,
                The student will use a technology tool to             191, 257, 323, 391; Technology
LA.7.6.4.Pa.b   communicate information in various settings.          Handbook, 451-455                             I     X




                                                                  Grade 7                                                         Page 69
                                                       FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION
                                                     INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS CORRELATION
                                                          SUNSHINE STATE STANDARDS


              SUBJECT:     English for Speakers of Other Languages (ESOL)
           CATEGORY:       M/J Language Arts 1, 2, 3 through ESOL
                                                                          *Use I for Indepth and M for Mentioned.
CATEGORY CODE NUMBER:      ESOLMJS
      SUBMISSION TITLE:    Longman Keystone (A-C)
                                                                          **Use an X to indicate English Language Proficiency Standards (ELPS) met at the
            PUBLISHER:     Pearson Longman ELT                            Beginning (B), Intermediate (I) and/or Advanced (A) levels for each standard.
             GRADE(S):     6-8

SSS STANDARD/              STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE                             ELPS MET**
ACCESS POINT               DESCRIPTION                                              TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*       B       I      A
Grade 8: Reading Process

                           Standard: The student demonstrates the
                           ability to read grade level text orally with
Fluency                    accuracy, appropriate rate, and expression.
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 15, 41, 58, 81, 105, 124,
                                                                               161, 191, 194, 215, 241, 256, 279, 307,
                                                                               326, 363, 390, 394; Reading Handbook:
                           The student will adjust reading rate based on       How to Improve Reading Fluency,
LA.8.1.5.1                 purpose, text difficulty, form, and style.          438–439                                      I         X       X      X
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 15, 41, 58, 81, 105, 124,
                                                                               161, 191, 194, 215, 241, 256, 279, 307,
                                                                               326, 363, 390, 394; Reading Handbook:
                                                                               How to Improve Reading Fluency,
LA.8.1.5.In.a              The student will read text with accuracy; and       438–439                                      I         X       X
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 15, 41, 58, 81, 105, 124,
                                                                               161, 191, 194, 215, 241, 256, 279, 307,
                                                                               326, 363, 390, 394; Reading Handbook:
                           The student will adjust reading rate based on       How to Improve Reading Fluency,
LA.8.1.5.In.b              difficulty.                                         438–439                                      I         X       X
                                                                               SE/TE: Fluency, 15, 41, 58, 81, 105, 124,
                                                                               161, 191, 194, 215, 241, 256, 279, 307,
                                                                               326, 363, 390, 394; Reading Handbook:
                                                                               How to Improve Reading Fluency,
LA.8.1.5.Su.a              The student will read text with accuracy.           438–439                                      I         X       X
                           The student will accurately and consistently        Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                           identify pictures or symbols paired with words in   T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
LA.8.1.5.Pa.a              stories and daily activities; and                   T334, T336, T404                             I         X
                           The student will identify pictures or symbols to    SE/TE: Recipe, 195; Instructions, 151;
LA.8.1.5.Pa.b              indicate the next step in a familiar activity.      Problem and Solution, 243                    I         X

                           Standard: The student uses multiple strategies
Vocabulary Development     to develop grade appropriate vocabulary.

                                                                           Grade 8                                                                   Page 70
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                     SE/TE: Vocabulary, 5, 19, 33, 45, 71, 85,
                                                                     97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207, 219,
                                                                     233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339, 351,
                                                                     367, 383; Academic Words, 6, 20, 34, 46,
                                                                     72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154, 166, 182, 208,
                The student will use new vocabulary that is          220, 234, 246, 270, 284, 300, 312, 340,
LA.8.1.6.1      introduced and taught directly;                      348, 352, 368, 384                               I     X   X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt,
                                                                     22–26, 48–53, 140–147; poetry, 91,
                                                                     248–251, 344, 345; novel, 114–119;
                                                                     legend, 168–175; short story, 222–227,
                The student will listen to, read, and discuss        286–293; play excerpt, 314–321; myth,
LA.8.1.6.2      familiar and conceptually challenging text;          370–377                                          I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 33, 45,
                                                                     71, 85, 97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207,
                                                                     219, 233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339,
                                                                     351, 367, 383; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                     6, 20, 34, 46, 72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154,
                                                                     166, 182, 208, 220, 234, 246, 270, 284,
                The student will use context clues to determine      300, 312, 340, 348, 352, 368, 384
LA.8.1.6.3      meanings of unfamiliar words;                                                                         I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 35, 47, 73, 87,
                                                                     99, 112, 139, 155, 155, 167, 183, 209,
                The student will categorize key vocabulary and       221, 235, 235, 247, 271, 285, 301, 313,
LA.8.1.6.4      identify salient features;                           341, 353, 369, 385                               I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 33, 45,
                                                                     71, 85, 97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207,
                                                                     219, 233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339,
                                                                     351, 367, 383; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                     6, 20, 34, 46, 72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154,
                                                                     166, 182, 208, 220, 234, 246, 270, 284,
                The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar   300, 312, 340, 348, 352, 368, 384
LA.8.1.6.5      words;                                                                                                I     X   X   X
                                                                     For related activities see: SE/TE:
                                                                     Strategies: analyze historical context, 21;
                The student will distinguish denotative and          analyze cultural context, 139; Word Study:
LA.8.1.6.6      connotative meanings of words;                       Synonyms, 167; Antonyms, 30                      I     X   X   X
                The student will identify and understand the         SE/TE: Prefix, 87; Suffix, 155, 235; Greek
                meaning of conceptually advanced prefixes,           and Latin roots: para, sitos, virus, nutrire,
LA.8.1.6.7      suffixes, and root words;                            183; astro, ology, geo, 353                      I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 35, 47, 73, 87,
                                                                     99, 112, 139, 155, 155, 167, 183, 209,
                The student will identify advanced word/phrase       221, 235, 235, 247, 271, 285, 301, 313,
LA.8.1.6.8      relationships and their meanings;                    341, 353, 369, 385                               I     X   X   X




                                                                Grade 8                                                             Page 71
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                   For related activities see: SE/TE:
                The student will determine the correct meaning of Synonyms, 167; Antonyms, 301;
LA.8.1.6.9      words with multiple meanings in context;           Homophones, 221                                I     X   X   X
                The student will determine meanings of words,      SE/TE: How to use a dictionary and
                pronunciation, parts of speech, etymologies, and thesaurus, 412–413
                alternate word choices by using a dictionary,
LA.8.1.6.10     thesaurus, and digital tools; and                                                                 I     X   X   X
                The student will identify the meaning of words and For related activities see: SE/TE: Literary
                phrases derived from Anglo-Saxon, Greek, and       terms: myth, 367; Genre: myth, 370–377
LA.8.1.6.11     Latin mythology.                                                                                  I     X   X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Vocabulary, 5, 19, 33, 45, 71, 85,
                                                                   97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207, 219,
                                                                   233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339, 351,
                                                                   367, 383; Academic Words, 6, 20, 34, 46,
                                                                   72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154, 166, 182, 208,
                The student will use new vocabulary that is        220, 234, 246, 270, 284, 300, 312, 340,
LA.8.1.6.In.a   introduced and taught directly;                    348, 352, 368, 384                             I     X   X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt,
                                                                      22–26, 48–53, 140–147; poetry, 91,
                                                                      248–251, 344, 345; novel, 114–119;
                                                                      legend, 168–175; short story, 222–227,
                The student will listen to, read, and discuss a       286–293; play excerpt, 314–321; myth,
LA.8.1.6.In.b   variety of text;                                      370–377                                     I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 33, 45,
                                                                   71, 85, 97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207,
                                                                   219, 233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339,
                                                                   351, 367, 383; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                   6, 20, 34, 46, 72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154,
                                                                   166, 182, 208, 220, 234, 246, 270, 284,
                The student will use context clues and graphics to 300, 312, 340, 348, 352, 368, 384
LA.8.1.6.In.c   determine the meaning of unknown words;                                                           I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 35, 47, 73, 87,
                                                                   99, 112, 139, 155, 155, 167, 183, 209,
                                                                   221, 235, 235, 247, 271, 285, 301, 313,
LA.8.1.6.In.d   The student will categorize key vocabulary;        341, 353, 369, 385                             I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 33, 45,
                                                                   71, 85, 97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207,
                                                                   219, 233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339,
                                                                   351, 367, 383; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                   6, 20, 34, 46, 72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154,
                                                                   166, 182, 208, 220, 234, 246, 270, 284,
                The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar 300, 312, 340, 348, 352, 368, 384
LA.8.1.6.In.e   words;                                                                                            I     X   X




                                                                  Grade 8                                                       Page 72
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                      SE/TE: Word Study, 7, 21, 35, 47, 73, 87,
                                                                      99, 112, 139, 155, 155, 167, 183, 209,
                The student will use phonics skills to decode         221, 235, 235, 247, 271, 285, 301, 313,
LA.8.1.6.In.f   unknown words;                                        341, 353, 369, 385                               I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Prefix, 87; Suffix, 155, 235; Greek
                The student will recognize and use prefixes,          and Latin roots: para, sitos, virus, nutrire,
LA.8.1.6.In.g   suffixes, and root words;                             183; astro, ology, geo, 353                      I     X   X
                                                                      For related activities see: SE/TE:
                                                                      Academic Words: Practice, 6, 20, 34, 46,
                                                                      72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154, 166, 182, 208,
                The student will identify word relationships (e.g.,   220, 234, 246, 270, 284, 300, 312, 340,
LA.8.1.6.In.h   common analogies) and their meaning;                  348, 352, 368, 384                               I     X   X
                The student will determine the meaning of a word      For related activities see: SE/TE:
                with multiple meanings (e.g., homographs) in text;    Synonyms, 167; Antonyms, 301;
LA.8.1.6.In.i   and                                                   Homophones, 221                                  I     X   X
                The student will determine the meaning of             SE/TE: How to use a dictionary and
                unknown words using a dictionary and digital          thesaurus, 412–413
LA.8.1.6.In.j   tools.                                                                                                 I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Vocabulary, 5, 19, 33, 45, 71, 85,
                                                                      97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207, 219,
                                                                      233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339, 351,
                                                                      367, 383; Academic Words, 6, 20, 34, 46,
                                                                      72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154, 166, 182, 208,
                The student will use new vocabulary that is           220, 234, 246, 270, 284, 300, 312, 340,
LA.8.1.6.Su.a   introduced and taught directly;                       348, 352, 368, 384                               I     X   X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt,
                                                                      22–26, 48–53, 140–147; poetry, 91,
                                                                      248–251, 344, 345; novel, 114–119;
                                                                      legend, 168–175; short story, 222–227,
                The student will listen to, read, and discuss a       286–293; play excerpt, 314–321; myth,
LA.8.1.6.Su.b   variety of text;                                      370–377                                          I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Vocabulary: Practice, 5, 19, 33, 45,
                                                                   71, 85, 97, 109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207,
                                                                   219, 233, 245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339,
                                                                   351, 367, 383; Academic Words: Practice,
                                                                   6, 20, 34, 46, 72, 86, 98, 110, 138, 154,
                                                                   166, 182, 208, 220, 234, 246, 270, 284,
                The student will use context clues and graphics to 300, 312, 340, 348, 352, 368, 384
LA.8.1.6.Su.c   determine the meaning of unknown words;                                                                I     X   X
                                                                   Add’l TE: Linguistic Note (Word Study), 7,
                                                                   21, 35, 47, 73, 87, 99, 112, 139, 155, 155,
                                                                   167, 183, 209, 221, 235, 235, 247, 271,
LA.8.1.6.Su.d   The student will categorize key vocabulary;        285, 301, 313, 341, 353, 369, 385                   I     X   X




                                                                  Grade 8                                                            Page 73
SSS STANDARD/           STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT            DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                              Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction
                                                                              (Vocabulary), 5, 19, 33, 45, 71, 85, 97,
                                                                              109, 137, 153, 165, 181, 207, 219, 233,
                        The student will relate new vocabulary to familiar    245, 269, 283, 299, 311, 339, 351, 367,
LA.8.1.6.Su.e           words;                                                383                                             I     X   X
                        The student will use phonics skills to decode         SE/TE: Word study, 7, 139, 247, 313, 369
LA.8.1.6.Su.f           words with diphthongs;                                                                                I     X   X
                        The student will recognize and use common             SE/TE: Suffix, 155, 235
LA.8.1.6.Su.g           suffixes (-ed, -ing);                                                                                 I     X   X
                        The student will determine the meaning of a word      For related activities see: SE/TE:
                        with multiple meanings (e.g., homographs) in text;    Synonyms, 167; Antonyms, 301;
LA.8.1.6.Su.h           and                                                   Homophones, 221                                 I     X   X
                        The student will determine the meaning of             SE/TE: How to use a dictionary and
                        unknown words using a dictionary and digital          thesaurus, 412–413
LA.8.1.6.Su.i           tools.                                                                                                I     X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                              meet individual needs: Vocabulary, 5, 19,
                                                                              33, 45, 71, 85, 97, 109, 137, 153, 165,
                        The student will identify new vocabulary that is      181, 207, 219, 233, 245, 269, 283, 299,
LA.8.1.6.Pa.a           introduced and taught directly;                       311, 339, 351, 367, 383                         I     X
                                                                              SE/TE: Review and Practice, Review and
                                                                              Practice, 14, 28, 54, 80, 92, 104, 120, 148,
                        The student will listen and respond to stories and    160, 176, 190, 214, 228, 240, 252, 278,
LA.8.1.6.Pa.b           informational text;                                   294, 306, 322, 346, 362, 378, 390               I     X
                                                                              SE/TE: In Your Own Words, 14, 40, 80,
                        The student will identify persons, objects, and       104, 160, 190, 214, 240, 278, 306, 362,
LA.8.1.6.Pa.c           actions by name or characteristic; and                390                                             I     X
                                                                              SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                              use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                              Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                              Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                              441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                              Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                              459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                              see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                              184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                              Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                                                                              156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                                                                              Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                        The student will select and respond to objects,
                                                                              T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                        pictures, or symbols paired with words in the
                                                                              T334, T336, T404
LA.8.1.6.Pa.d           context of familiar school activities.                                                                I     X
                        Standard: The student uses a variety of
Reading Comprehension   strategies to comprehend grade level text.




                                                                          Grade 8                                                           Page 74
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                    SE/TE: Strategies: predict, 111, modify
                                                                    predictions, 285; Prepare to Read:
                                                                    Background Knowledge, 4, 18, 32, 44, 70,
                                                                    84, 96, 108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206, 218,
                                                                    232, 244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338, 350,
                The student will use background knowledge of
                                                                    366, 382; Set a Purpose for Reading, 8,
                subject and related content areas, prereading
                                                                    22, 36, 48, 74, 88, 91, 100, 112, 114, 140,
                strategies, graphic representations, and
                                                                    156, 159, 168, 184, 210, 213, 222, 236,
                knowledge of text structure to make and confirm
                                                                    248, 272, 286, 302, 314, 342, 344, 345,
                complex predictions of content, purpose, and
                                                                    354, 370, 386, 388
LA.8.1.7.1      organization of a reading selection;                                                                I     X   X   X
                The student will analyze the authors purpose      SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author’s
                and/or perspective in a variety of texts and      Purpose, 209; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.8.1.7.2      understand how they affect meaning;               194, 256, 326, 394                                I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Strategies: summarize, 221;
                The student will determine the main idea or       identify main idea and details, 301;
                essential message in grade-level or higher texts  connect ideas, 341; also see: Writing: Main
                through inferring, paraphrasing, summarizing, and idea and details, 255, 260–263, 365
LA.8.1.7.3      identifying relevant details;                                                                       I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Strategies: recognize sequence,
                                                                  35; recognize cause and effect, 99;
                                                                  Literary response and evaluation:
                The student will identify cause-and-effect        identifying cause and effect, 104; Cause
LA.8.1.7.4      relationships in text;                            and effect structures, 392                        I     X   X   X
                The student will analyze a variety of text        SE/TE: Strategies: analyze text structure,
                structures (e.g., comparison/contrast,            247; also see: Strategies: recognize
                cause/effect, chronological order,                sequence, 35; identify problems and
                argument/support, lists) and text features (main  solutions, 87; recognize cause and effect,
                headings with subheadings) and explain their      99; identify main idea and details, 301
LA.8.1.7.5      impact on meaning in text;                                                                          I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: For related information see:
                                                                    Literary terms: theme, 283; also see: The
                                                                    Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44, 70, 84, 96,
                                                                    108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206, 218, 232,
                The student will analyze and evaluate similar       244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338, 350, 366,
                themes or topics by different authors across a      382; Link the Readings, 58, 124, 194, 256,
LA.8.1.7.6      variety of fiction and nonfiction selections;       326, 394                                        I     X   X   X
                The student will compare and contrast elements in SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                multiple texts (e.g., setting, characters, problems); 155; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.8.1.7.7      and                                                   194, 256, 326, 394                            I     X   X   X




                                                              Grade 8                                                             Page 75
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: monitor
                The student will use strategies to repair              comprehension, 235; Comprehension, 14,
                comprehension of grade-appropriate text when           28, 40, 54, 80, 92, 104, 120, 148, 160,
                self-monitoring indicates confusion, including but     176, 190, 214, 228, 240, 252, 278, 294,
                not limited to rereading, checking context clues,      306, 322, 346, 362, 378, 390
                predicting, note-making, summarizing, using
                graphic and semantic organizers, questioning,
LA.8.1.7.8      and clarifying by checking other sources.                                                              I     X   X   X
                The student will use background knowledge of the SE/TE: Strategies: predict, 111, modify
                subject, guided previewing strategies, graphic         predictions, 285; also see: Set a Purpose
                representations, and text features (e.g., table of     for Reading, 8, 22, 36, 48, 74, 88, 91, 100,
                contents, headings, subheadings, charts and            112, 114, 140, 156, 159, 168, 184, 210,
                maps, text styles, index, glossary) to make and        213, 222, 236, 248, 272, 286, 302, 314,
                confirm predictions of content and purpose of          342, 344, 345, 354, 370, 386, 388
LA.8.1.7.In.a   reading selections;                                                                                    I     X   X
                The student will identify the author’s purpose         SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author’s
                (e.g., to inform, entertain, persuade) in a variety of Purpose, 209; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
                text formats (e.g., stories, letters, reports) and use 194, 256, 326, 394
LA.8.1.7.In.b   the information to construct meaning;                                                                  I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: summarize, 221;
                                                                       identify main idea and details, 301;
                The student will determine the main idea or            connect ideas, 341; also see: Writing: Main
                essential message in text through guided retelling idea and details, 255, 260–263, 365
LA.8.1.7.In.c   and identifying relevant details and facts;                                                            I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: recognize sequence,
                                                                       35; recognize cause and effect, 99;
                                                                       Literary response and evaluation:
                The student will identify cause and effect             identifying cause and effect, 104; Cause
LA.8.1.7.In.d   relationships in stories and informational text;       and effect structures, 392                      I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: analyze text structure,
                                                                       247; also see: Strategies: recognize
                The student will identify text structures (e.g.,       sequence, 35; identify problems and
                comparison/contrast, cause/effect relationships,       solutions, 87; recognize cause and effect,
                chronological order) in narrative and informational 99; identify main idea and details, 301
LA.8.1.7.In.e   text using strategies, including graphic organizers;                                                   I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44,
                                                                   70, 84, 96, 108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206,
                                                                   218, 232, 244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338,
                The student will identify a theme shared by two or 350, 366, 382; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.8.1.7.In.f   more fiction and nonfiction selections;            194, 256, 326, 394                                  I     X   X
                The student will identify similarities and             SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                differences in characters, actions, or settings in     155; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.8.1.7.In.g   two texts; and                                         194, 256, 326, 394                              I     X   X




                                                                Grade 8                                                              Page 76
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will use strategies to repair            SE/TE: Comprehension, 14, 28, 40, 54,
                comprehension, including but not limited to          80, 92, 104, 120, 148, 160, 176, 190, 214,
                rereading, checking context clues, predicting,       228, 240, 252, 278, 294, 306, 322, 346,
                using graphic organizers, and requesting             362, 378, 390
LA.8.1.7.In.h   assistance for clarification.                                                                        I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                       use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                       Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                       Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                       441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                       Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                       459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                       see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                       184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                       Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                The student will use background knowledge of the
                                                                       156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                subject and text features (e.g., title, illustrations,
                                                                       Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                graphics, table of contents, headings) to make
                                                                       T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                and confirm predictions of content of reading
                                                                       T334, T336, T404
LA.8.1.7.Su.a   selections;                                                                                          I     X   X
                The student will identify the author’s purpose         SE/TE: Strategies: Identify Author’s
                (e.g., to inform, entertain, persuade) using key       Purpose, 209; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
                words, phrases, and graphics in a variety of           194, 256, 326, 394
LA.8.1.7.Su.b   reading selections;                                                                                  I     X   X
                The student will determine the main idea or            SE/TE: Strategies: summarize, 221;
                essential message in text through identifying the identify main idea and details, 301;
                topic, relevant details, and facts, including but not connect ideas, 341; also see: Writing: Main
                limited to who, what, where, when, how, and what idea and details, 255, 260–263, 365
LA.8.1.7.Su.c   happened;                                                                                            I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Strategies: recognize sequence,
                                                                       35; recognize cause and effect, 99;
                                                                       Literary response and evaluation:
                The student will identify explicit cause/effect        identifying cause and effect, 104; Cause
LA.8.1.7.Su.d   relationships in stories and informational text;       and effect structures, 392                    I     X   X
                The student will identify similarities and             SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                differences and the sequence of events in stories 155; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 124,
                and informational text using strategies, including 194, 256, 326, 394
LA.8.1.7.Su.e   graphic organizers;                                                                                  I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: For related information see:
                                                                       Literary terms: theme, 283; also see: The
                                                                       Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44, 70, 84, 96,
                                                                       108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206, 218, 232,
                                                                       244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338, 350, 366,
                The student will recognize a theme shared by two 382; Link the Readings, 58, 124, 194, 256,
LA.8.1.7.Su.f   fiction or nonfiction selections; and                  326, 394                                      I     X   X




                                                                 Grade 8                                                           Page 77
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will use strategies to repair            Add’l TE: Practice (Comprehension), 14,
                comprehension, including but not limited to          28, 40, 54, 80, 92, 104, 120, 148, 160,
                rereading, checking context clues, predicting,       176, 190, 214, 228, 240, 252, 278, 294,
                using graphic organizers, and checking own           306, 322, 346, 362, 378, 390
LA.8.1.7.Su.g   understanding when reminded.                                                                       I     X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Informational text, 8–13, 36–39,
                                                                     74–78, 100–103, 156–159, 184–189,
                                                                     210–213, 236–239, 272–277, 302–305,
                                                                     354–361, 386–389; novel excerpt, 22–26,
                                                                     48–53, 140–147; song lyrics, 79; personal
                                                                     narrative, 88–90; poetry, 91, 248–251,
                                                                     344, 345; interview, 112–113; novel,
                                                                     114–119; legend, 168–175; short story,
                                                                     222–227, 286–293; play excerpt, 314–321;
                The student will identify persons, objects, actions,
                                                                     letter, 342–343; myth, 370–377
                and settings in read-aloud narrative and
LA.8.1.7.Pa.a   informational text;                                                                                I     X
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                     use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                     Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                     Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                     441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                     Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                     459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                     see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                     184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                     Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                                                                     156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                The student will respond accurately and
                                                                     T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                consistently to pictures or symbols paired with
                                                                     T334, T336, T404
LA.8.1.7.Pa.b   words on charts used to guide school activities;                                                   I     X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Informational text, 8–13, 36–39,
                                                                     74–78, 100–103, 156–159, 184–189,
                                                                     210–213, 236–239, 272–277, 302–305,
                                                                     354–361, 386–389; novel excerpt, 22–26,
                                                                     48–53, 140–147; song lyrics, 79; personal
                                                                     narrative, 88–90; poetry, 91, 248–251,
                                                                     344, 345; interview, 112–113; novel,
                                                                     114–119; legend, 168–175; short story,
                                                                     222–227, 286–293; play excerpt, 314–321;
                The student will recognize details and what
                                                                     letter, 342–343; myth, 370–377
                happened in read-aloud stories and informational
LA.8.1.7.Pa.c   text;                                                                                              I     X




                                                                 Grade 8                                                         Page 78
SSS STANDARD/                STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                            PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT                 DESCRIPTION                                                     TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                                     use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                                     Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                                     Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                                     441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                                     Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                                     459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                                     see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                                     184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                                     Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                                                                                     156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                             The student will use pictures or symbols paired
                                                                                     T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                             with words to achieve desired cause/effect
                                                                                     T334, T336, T404
LA.8.1.7.Pa.d                outcomes in daily classroom activities;                                                                 I     X
                                                                                     Add’l TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44,
                                                                                     70, 84, 96, 108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206,
                                                                                     218, 232, 244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338,
                             The student will recognize familiar read-aloud          350, 366, 382; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.8.1.7.Pa.e                stories with a theme (e.g., caring); and                194, 256, 326, 394                              I     X
                             The student will use resources when necessary to SE/TE: How to use a dictionary and
                             clarify meaning of pictures, symbols, or words in thesaurus, 412–413
LA.8.1.7.Pa.f                classroom activities.                                                                                   I     X
Grade 8: Literary Analysis

                             Standard: The student identifies, analyzes,
                             and applies knowledge of the elements of a
                             variety of fiction and literary texts to develop a
Fiction                      thoughtful response to a literary selection.
                                                                                     SE/TE: Novel excerpt, 22–26, 48–53,
                             The student will identify, analyze, and compare         140–147; poetry, 91, 248–251, 344, 345;
                             the characteristics of various genres (e.g., poetry,    novel, 114–119; legend, 168–175; short
                             fiction, short story, dramatic literature) as forms     story, 222–227, 286–293; play excerpt,
LA.8.2.1.1                   chosen by an author to accomplish a purpose;            314–321; myth, 370–377                          I     X   X   X
                             The student will locate and analyze elements of         SE/TE: Literary terms: conflict, 19;
                             characterization, setting, and plot, including rising   characters, 85; external conflict, 109;
                             action, conflict, resolution, theme, and other          foreshadowing, 137; character motive,
                             literary elements as appropriate in a variety of        165; climax, 219; theme, 283
LA.8.2.1.2                   fiction;                                                                                                I     X   X   X
                             The student will locate various literary devices        SE/TE: Poetry, 91, 248–251, 344, 345;
                             (e.g., sound, meter, figurative and descriptive         Literary terms: rhyme, 339; personification,
                             language), graphics, and structure and analyze          367; Literary response and evaluation:
                             how they contribute to mood and meaning in              writing poetry, 253, 347: Punctuation, in
LA.8.2.1.3                   poetry;                                                 prose and poetry, 348                           I     X   X   X




                                                                             Grade 8                                                               Page 79
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                      PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                               TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                             I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                  SE/TE: Strategies: analyze historical
                                                                  context, 21; also see: The Big Question, 4,
                                                                  18, 32, 44, 70, 84, 96, 108, 136, 152, 164,
                The student will identify and analyze universal   180, 206, 218, 232, 244, 268, 282, 298,
                themes and symbols across genres and historical 310, 338, 350, 366, 382; Link the
LA.8.2.1.4      periods, and explain their significance;          Readings, 58, 124, 194, 256, 326, 394                     I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Response to Literature, 15, 29, 55,
                The student will develop an interpretation of a   81, 93, 105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229,
                selection and support through sustained use of    241, 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363,
LA.8.2.1.5      examples and contextual evidence;                 379, 391                                                  I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: For related information see:
                                                                  Literary terms: theme, 283; also see: The
                                                                  Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44, 70, 84, 96,
                The student will compare literary texts that      108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206, 218, 232,
                express a universal theme, providing textual      244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338, 350, 366,
                evidence (e.g., examples, details, quotations) as 382; Link the Readings, 58, 124, 194, 256,
LA.8.2.1.6      support for the identified theme;                 326, 394                                                  I     X   X   X
                The student will locate and analyze an author's          SE/TE: Literary terms: rhyme, 339;
                use of allusions and descriptive, idiomatic, and         personification, 367
                figurative language in a variety of literary text,
                identifying how word choice is used to appeal to
                the reader's senses and emotions, providing
LA.8.2.1.7      evidence from text to support the analysis;                                                                 I     X   X   X
                The student will explain how ideas, values, and          SE/TE: Strategies: analyze historical
                themes of a literary work often reflect the historical   context, 21; also see: Genre: legend,
LA.8.2.1.8      period in which it was written;                          168–175; myth, 370–377                             I     X   X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Word Study: Greek and Latin
                                                                         roots: para, sitos, virus, nutrire, 183; astro,
                The student will describe changes in the English         ology, geo, 353; also see: Strategies:
                language over time, and support these                    analyze historical context, 21
LA.8.2.1.9      descriptions with examples of literary texts; and                                                           I     X   X   X
                The student will use interest and recommendation SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 125, 195,
                of others to select a balance of age and ability     257, 327, 395
                appropriate fiction materials to read (e.g., novels,
                historical fiction, mythology, poetry) to expand the
                core foundation of knowledge necessary to
                function as a fully literate member of a shared
LA.8.2.1.10     culture.                                                                                                    I     X   X   X
                The student will identify similarities and           SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                differences in characteristics of various genres of 155; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.8.2.1.In.a   literature (e.g., fiction, poetry, drama);           194, 256, 326, 394                                     I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Literary terms: conflict, 19;
                The student will identify story elements (e.g.,      characters, 85; external conflict, 109;
                character, setting, plot, problem/solution, tone) in foreshadowing, 137; character motive,
LA.8.2.1.In.b   stories and drama;                                   165; climax, 219; theme, 283                           I     X   X



                                                                Grade 8                                                                   Page 80
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                            PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                      TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                        SE/TE: Poetry, 91, 248–251, 344, 345;
                The student will identify examples of literary          Literary terms: rhyme, 339; personification,
                devices (e.g., sound, figurative language,              367; Literary response and evaluation:
                illustrations, fonts, word placement) that convey       writing poetry, 253, 347: Punctuation, in
LA.8.2.1.In.c   meaning in poetry;                                      prose and poetry, 348                           I     X   X
                                                                 SE/TE: The Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44,
                                                                 70, 84, 96, 108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206,
                                                                 218, 232, 244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338,
                The student will identify a common theme in more 350, 366, 382; Link the Readings, 58, 124,
LA.8.2.1.In.d   than one literary genre;                         194, 256, 326, 394                                     I     X   X
                The student will describe how a literature              SE/TE: Literary response and evaluation:
                selection connects to life experiences and impacts      comparing your experiences to text, 93;
                the reader based on support from the text or            researching current events, 161
LA.8.2.1.In.e   personal experiences;                                                                                   I     X   X
                The student will identify similarities and              SE/TE: Strategies: compare and contrast,
                differences in characteristics of two literature        155; also see: Link the Readings, 58, 124,
                selections or a common theme in more than one           194, 256, 326, 394
LA.8.2.1.In.f   literary genre;                                                                                         I     X   X
                The student will identify examples of literary          SE/TE: Literary Terms, 45, 85, 219, 245,
LA.8.2.1.In.g   devices (e.g., expression, tone) in literature;         311, 339                                        I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Strategies: analyze historical
                The student will identify information about the         context, 21; also see: Genre: legend,
LA.8.2.1.In.h   historical time periods reflected in literary works;    168–175; myth, 370–377                          I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Genre: legend, 168–175; myth,
                The student will distinguish differences in             370–377
                vocabulary and language used in contemporary
                and historical texts; and select a variety of fiction
                materials based on interest and recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.8.2.1.In.i   member of a shared culture.                                                                             I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Novel excerpt, 22–26, 48–53,
                                                                        140–147; poetry, 91, 248–251, 344, 345;
                The student will identify basic characteristics of      novel, 114–119; legend, 168–175; short
                various genres of literature (e.g., fiction, poetry,    story, 222–227, 286–293; play excerpt,
LA.8.2.1.Su.a   drama);                                                 314–321; myth, 370–377                          I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Literary terms: conflict, 19;
                                                                        characters, 85; external conflict, 109;
                The student will identify basic story elements          foreshadowing, 137; character motive,
LA.8.2.1.Su.b   (character, setting, problem/solution) in fiction;      165; climax, 219; theme, 283                    I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Poetry, 91, 248–251, 344, 345;
                                                                        Literary terms: rhyme, 339; personification,
                The student will identify examples of literary          367; Literary response and evaluation:
                devices (e.g., rhyme, rhythm, descriptive               writing poetry, 253, 347: Punctuation, in
LA.8.2.1.Su.c   language) in poetry;                                    prose and poetry, 348                           I     X   X



                                                                  Grade 8                                                             Page 81
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                     PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                              TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                         I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                 SE/TE: For related information see:
                                                                 Literary terms: theme, 283; also see: The
                                                                 Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44, 70, 84, 96,
                                                                 108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206, 218, 232,
                                                                 244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338, 350, 366,
                The student will identify a common theme in more 382; Link the Readings, 58, 124, 194, 256,
LA.8.2.1.Su.d   than one literary work;                          326, 394                                              I     X   X
                                                                     Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction, 15, 29,
                The student will describe how the characters,        55, 81, 93, 105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191,
                problem/solution, or theme in a literature selection 229, 241, 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347,
LA.8.2.1.Su.e   connect to life experiences;                         363, 379, 391                                     I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Literary terms: theme, 283; also
                                                                     see: The Big Question, 4, 18, 32, 44, 70,
                                                                     84, 96, 108, 136, 152, 164, 180, 206, 218,
                                                                     232, 244, 268, 282, 298, 310, 338, 350,
                The student will identify a common theme in more 366, 382; Link the Readings, 58, 124, 194,
LA.8.2.1.Su.f   than one literary work;                              256, 326, 394                                     I     X   X
                The student will identify common literary devices SE/TE: Literary terms, 45, 85, 219, 245,
                (e.g., point of view, figurative language, idioms) in 311, 339
LA.8.2.1.Su.g   stories;                                                                                               I     X   X
                                                                       For related activities see: SE/TE:
                The student will identify information about            Strategies: analyze historical context, 21;
                characters, settings, and events reflected in          also see: Historical Genre: legend,
LA.8.2.1.Su.h   historical stories;                                    168–175; myth, 370–377                          I     X   X
                                                                       For related activities see: SE/TE:
                                                                       Strategies: analyze historical context, 21;
                The student will identify differences in vocabulary also see: Historical Genre: legend,
LA.8.2.1.Su.i   used in historical and contemporary stories; and 168–175; myth, 370–377                                I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 125, 195,
                The student will select a variety of fiction materials 257, 327, 395
                based on interest and recommendations to
                expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.8.2.1.Su.j   member of a shared culture.                                                                            I     X   X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt,
                                                                      22–26, 48–53, 140–147; poetry, 91,
                                                                      248–251, 344, 345; novel, 114–119;
                The student will recognize characters, objects,       legend, 168–175; short story, 222–227,
                and actions in read-aloud literature from various     286–293; play excerpt, 314–321; myth,
LA.8.2.1.Pa.a   genres (e.g., fiction, poetry, drama);                370–377                                          I     X
                                                                      Add’l TE: Differentiated Instruction, 15, 29,
                The student will recognize words that describe        55, 81, 93, 105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191,
                people, objects, and actions in read-aloud            229, 241, 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347,
LA.8.2.1.Pa.b   literature;                                           363, 379, 391                                    I     X




                                                                Grade 8                                                              Page 82
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                     Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt,
                                                                     22–26, 48–53, 140–147; poetry, 91,
                                                                     248–251, 344, 345; novel, 114–119;
                The student will recognize familiar read-aloud       legend, 168–175; short story, 222–227,
                stories, poems, or drama with a theme (e.g.,         286–293; play excerpt, 314–321; myth,
LA.8.2.1.Pa.c   bravery);                                            370–377                                        I     X
                                                                        Add’l TE: Audio CD: Novel excerpt,
                                                                        22–26, 48–53, 140–147; poetry, 91,
                                                                        248–251, 344, 345; novel, 114–119;
                The student will use pictures, symbols, and words legend, 168–175; short story, 222–227,
                to describe characters, objects, actions, and           286–293; play excerpt, 314–321; myth,
LA.8.2.1.Pa.d   settings in familiar read-aloud literature; and         370–377                                     I     X
                The student will select fiction materials to listen to, SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 125, 195,
                based on interest and recommendations, to               257, 327, 395
                expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to function as a member of a shared
LA.8.2.1.Pa.e   culture.                                                                                            I     X

                Standard: The student identifies, analyzes,
                and applies knowledge of the elements of a
                variety of non-fiction, informational, and
                expository texts to demonstrate an
Non-Fiction     understanding of the information presented.
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                     use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                     Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                     Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                     441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                     Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                     459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                     see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                     184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                     Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                                                                     156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                The student will locate, use, and analyze specific
                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                information from organizational text features (e.g.,
                                                                     T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                table of contents, headings, captions, bold print,
                                                                     T334, T336, T404
LA.8.2.2.1      italics, glossaries, indices, key/guide words);                                                     I
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: summarize, 221;
                                                                     identify main idea and details, 301;
                The student will synthesize and use information      connect ideas, 341; also see: Writing: Main
                from the text to state the main idea or provide      idea and details, 255, 260–263, 365
LA.8.2.2.2      relevant details;                                                                                   I     X   X   X




                                                                 Grade 8                                                          Page 83
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                    TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will organize information to show          SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31,
                understanding or relationships among facts,            40, 41, 43, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93,
                ideas, and events (e.g., representing key points       95, 104, 107, 123, 124, 128, 151, 160,
                within text through charting, mapping,                 163, 179, 193, 198, 215, 217, 231, 243,
                paraphrasing, summarizing, or                          255, 260, 281, 297, 309, 325, 330, 349,
LA.8.2.2.3      comparing/contrasting);                                365, 381, 393                                  I     X   X   X
                The student will identify and analyze the              SE/TE: Genre: informational text, 8–13,
                characteristics of a variety of types of text (e.g.,   36–39, 74–78, 100–103, 156–159,
                reference works, reports, technical manuals,           184–189, 210–213, 236–239, 272–277,
                newspapers, magazines, biographies, periodicals,       302–305, 354–361, 386–389; interview,
                procedures, instructions, practical/functional         112–113
LA.8.2.2.4      texts); and                                                                                           I     X   X   X
                The student will use interest and recommendation SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 125, 195,
                of others to select a variety of age and ability     257, 327, 395
                appropriate nonfiction materials (e.g., biographies
                and topical areas, such as science, music, art,
                history, sports, current events) to expand the core
                knowledge necessary to connect topics and
                function as a fully literate member of a shared
LA.8.2.2.5      culture.                                                                                              I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                     use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                     Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                     Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                     441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                     Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                     459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                     see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                     184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                     Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                                                                     156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                The student will locate information provided in text
                                                                     Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                features (e.g., table of contents, headings,
                                                                     T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                subheadings, charts and maps, text styles, index,
                                                                     T334, T336, T404
LA.8.2.2.In.a   glossary);                                                                                            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: summarize, 221;
                                                                     identify main idea and details, 301;
                The student will use information from nonfiction     connect ideas, 341; also see: Writing: Main
                text to identify the main idea and supporting        idea and details, 255, 260–263, 365
LA.8.2.2.In.b   details;                                                                                              I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31,
                                                                     40, 41, 43, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93,
                                                                     95, 104, 107, 123, 124, 128, 151, 160,
                The student will organize information to show        163, 179, 193, 198, 215, 217, 231, 243,
                understanding (e.g., using graphic organizers,       255, 260, 281, 297, 309, 325, 330, 349,
LA.8.2.2.In.c   guided retelling);                                   365, 381, 393                                    I     X   X



                                                               Grade 8                                                              Page 84
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                       SE/TE: Genre: informational text, 8–13,
                The student will identify basic characteristics of     36–39, 74–78, 100–103, 156–159,
                variety of nonfiction text (e.g., reference materials, 184–189, 210–213, 236–239, 272–277,
                dictionaries, newspapers, magazines,                   302–305, 354–361, 386–389; interview,
LA.8.2.2.In.d   instructions, manuals with diagrams); and              112–113                                       I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 125, 195,
                The student will select a variety of nonfiction        257, 327, 395
                materials based on interest or recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.8.2.2.In.e   member of a shared culture.                                                                          I     X   X
                                                                         SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                         use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                         Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                         Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                         441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                         Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                         459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                         see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                         184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                         Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                                                                         156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                                                                         Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                The student will identify information in text
                                                                         T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                features (e.g., title, illustrations and graphics, table
                                                                         T334, T336, T404
LA.8.2.2.Su.a   of contents, headings);                                                                              I     X   X
                                                                         Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: informational
                The student will use information from read-aloud text, 8–13, 36–39, 74–78, 100–103,
                nonfiction text to identify the main idea and            156–159, 184–189, 210–213, 236–239,
                supporting details (e.g., who, what, where, when, 272–277, 302–305, 354–361, 386–389;
LA.8.2.2.Su.b   how, what happened);                                     interview, 112–113                          I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31,
                                                                    40, 41, 43, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93,
                                                                    95, 104, 107, 123, 124, 128, 151, 160,
                The student will organize information to show       163, 179, 193, 198, 215, 217, 231, 243,
                understanding (e.g., using simple graphic           255, 260, 281, 297, 309, 325, 330, 349,
LA.8.2.2.Su.c   organizers);                                        365, 381, 393                                    I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 125, 195,
                The student will select a variety of nonfiction     257, 327, 395
                materials based on interest or recommendations
                to expand the core foundation of knowledge
                necessary to connect topics and function as a
LA.8.2.2.Su.e   member of a shared culture.                                                                          I     X   X




                                                                Grade 8                                                            Page 85
SSS STANDARD/              STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT               DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                                Add’l TE: Audio CD: Genre: informational
                                                                                text, 8–13, 36–39, 74–78, 100–103,
                                                                                156–159, 184–189, 210–213, 236–239,
                           The student will recognize persons, objects, and     272–277, 302–305, 354–361, 386–389;
LA.8.2.2.Pa.a              actions in read-aloud informational text;            interview, 112–113                             I     X
                                                                                SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                                meet individual needs: Strategies: Maps
                                                                                and Diagrams, 440–441; Graphs,
                                                                                442–443; Graphic Organizers, 444; Add’l
                           The student will respond purposefully to pictures    TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T132,
                           or symbols paired with words used to guide           T134, T202, T204, T264, T266, T334,
LA.8.2.2.Pa.b              classroom and school activities;                     T336, T404                                     I     X
                                                                                SE/TE: Teacher can adapt the following to
                                                                                meet individual needs: Strategies:
                                                                                preview, 7; skim, 73; use visuals, 353; How
                                                                                to Use Reference Books, 412-413; Skills
                                                                                and Learning Strategies, 416; Maps and
                                                                                Diagrams, 440-441; Graphs, 442-443;
                                                                                Graphic Organizers, 444; Conducting
                                                                                Research, 459; Technology Handbook,
                                                                                463-467; also see: Science Text, 36–39,
                                                                                100–103, 184–189, 236–239, 354–361,
                                                                                386–389; Social Studies Text, 8–13,
                                                                                74–78, 156–159, 210–213, 272–277,
                                                                                302–305; Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2,
                                                                                T66, T68, T132, T134, T202, T204, T264,
                           The student will recognize pictures or symbols       T266, T334, T336, T404
                           paired with words depicting a sequence in familiar
LA.8.2.2.Pa.c              activities; and                                                                                     I     X
                                                                              SE/TE: Further Readings, 59, 125, 195,
                           The student will select nonfiction materials based 257, 327, 395
                           on interest or recommendations to expand the
                           core foundation of knowledge necessary to
LA.8.2.2.Pa.d              function as a member of a shared culture.                                                           I     X
Grade 8: Writing Process
                           Standard: The student will use prewriting
                           strategies to generate ideas and formulate a
Pre-Writing                plan.
                                                                              SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330,
                           The student will prewrite by generating ideas from 398; The Writing Process, 448-451
                           multiple sources (e.g., prior knowledge,
                           discussion with others, writers notebook, research
                           materials, or other reliable sources) based upon
LA.8.3.1.1                 teacher-directed topics and personal interests;                                                     I     X   X   X




                                                                         Grade 8                                                             Page 86
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                     SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330,
                                                                     398; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                The student will prewrite by making a plan for       Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                writing that addresses purpose, audience, main       107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                idea, logical sequence, and time frame for           243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.3.1.2      completion; and                                      381, 393                                       I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31,
                The student will prewrite by using organizational 40, 41, 43, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93,
                strategies and tools (e.g., technology,           95, 104, 107, 123, 124, 128, 151, 160,
                spreadsheet, outline, chart, table, graph, Venn   163, 179, 193, 198, 215, 217, 231, 243,
                Diagram, web, story map, plot pyramid) to develop 255, 260, 281, 297, 309, 325, 330, 349,
LA.8.3.1.3      a personal organizational style.                  365, 381, 393                                     I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330,
                                                                     398; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                The student will prewrite by generating ideas        Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                through a variety of sources (e.g., prior            107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                knowledge, discussions, printed material, lists,     243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.3.1.In.a   graphic organizers);                                 381, 393                                       I     X   X
                The student will prewrite by identifying the         SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330,
                purpose (e.g., inform, entertain, persuade,          398; The Writing Process, 448-451
                explain), intended audience, and central idea
LA.8.3.1.In.b   appropriate for the type of writing; and                                                            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31,
                                                                     40, 41, 43, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93,
                The student will prewrite by using graphic           95, 104, 107, 123, 124, 128, 151, 160,
                organizers, charts and outlines to arrange main      163, 179, 193, 198, 215, 217, 231, 243,
                ideas and relevant supporting details into a logical 255, 260, 281, 297, 309, 325, 330, 349,
LA.8.3.1.In.c   sequence.                                            365, 381, 393                                  I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330,
                                                                     398; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                The student will prewrite by generating ideas        Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                through a variety of sources (e.g., brainstorming,   107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                graphic organizers, group discussions, printed       243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.3.1.Su.a   materials) to plan for writing;                      381, 393                                       I     X   X
                The student will prewrite by identifying the         SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330,
                purpose (e.g., inform, entertain) and intended       398; The Writing Process, 448-451
LA.8.3.1.Su.b   audience for the writing; and                                                                       I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Graphic organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31,
                                                                     40, 41, 43, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93,
                                                                     95, 104, 107, 123, 124, 128, 151, 160,
                The student will prewrite by using a graphic         163, 179, 193, 198, 215, 217, 231, 243,
                organizer to arrange main ideas and supporting       255, 260, 281, 297, 309, 325, 330, 349,
LA.8.3.1.Su.c   details in a logical sequence.                       365, 381, 393                                  I     X   X




                                                               Grade 8                                                            Page 87
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                      SE/TE: Prewrite, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330,
                The student will select information about familiar    398; The Writing Process, 448-451; Add’l
                persons objects, activities, or events as the topic   TE: Differentiated Instruction, 63, 129, 199,
LA.8.3.1.Pa.a   of communication.                                     261, 331, 399                                    I     X
                Standard: The student will write a draft
                appropriate to the topic, audience, and
Drafting        purpose.
                The student will draft writing by developing ideas    SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330, 398;
                from the prewriting plan using primary and            The Writing Process, 448-451
                secondary sources appropriate to the purpose
LA.8.3.2.1      and audience;                                                                                          I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Organization: Chronological order,
                                                                      31; Classify, 193; Compare and contrast,
                The student will draft writing by establishing a      179; Problem and solution, 243; Sequence
                logical organizational pattern with supporting        of events, 107; Draft, 62, 128, 198, 260,
                details that are substantial, specific, and relevant; 330, 398; The Writing Process, 448-451
LA.8.3.2.2      and                                                                                                    I     X   X   X
                The student will draft writing by analyzing           Writing examples exist for all writing
                language techniques of professional authors           activities: SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 198, 260,
                (rhythm, varied sentence structure) to develop a 330, 398; The Writing Process, 448-451
                personal style, demonstrating a command of
LA.8.3.2.3      language with freshness of expression.                                                                 I     X   X   X
                The student will draft writing by using a prewriting SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330, 398;
                plan to develop central idea and related main         The Writing Process, 448-451
LA.8.3.2.In.a   ideas and supporting details; and                                                                      I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Organization: Chronological order,
                                                                      31; Classify, 193; Compare and contrast,
                                                                      179; Problem and solution, 243; Sequence
                The student will draft writing by organizing plan     of events, 107; Draft, 62, 128, 198, 260,
                into a logical sequence that fits the purpose of the 330, 398; The Writing Process, 448-451
LA.8.3.2.In.b   writing.                                                                                               I     X   X
                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                The student will draft writing by using a prewriting individual needs: SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128,
                plan to develop the main idea and supporting         198, 260, 330, 398; The Writing Process,
LA.8.3.2.Su.a   details; and                                         448-451                                           I     X   X
                                                                     Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                     individual needs: SE/TE: Organization:
                                                                     Chronological order, 31; Classify, 193;
                                                                     Compare and contrast, 179; Problem and
                                                                     solution, 243; Sequence of events, 107;
                The student will draft writing by organizing writing Draft, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330, 398; The
LA.8.3.2.Su.b   into a logical sequence according to the purpose. Writing Process, 448-451                             I     X   X
                The student will make an initial attempt to          SE/TE: Draft, 62, 128, 198, 260, 330, 398;
                communicate information about familiar persons, The Writing Process, 448-451; Add’l TE:
                objects, activities and events using pictures,       Differentiated Instruction, 63, 129, 199,
LA.8.3.2.Pa.a   symbols, or words.                                   261, 331, 399                                     I     X

                                                               Grade 8                                                               Page 88
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                     I/M*   B   I   A

                Standard: The student will revise and refine
Revising        the draft for clarity and effectiveness.
                The student will revise by evaluating the draft for    SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 199, 261, 331,
                development of ideas and content, logical              399; The Writing Process, 448-451
                organization, voice, point of view, word choice,
LA.8.3.3.1      and sentence variation;                                                                               I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Writing Checklist, 63, 129, 199,
                The student will revise by creating clarity and logic 261, 331, 399; Rubrics for Writing, 452-
                by maintaining central theme, idea, or unifying       454
LA.8.3.3.2      point and developing relationships among ideas;                                                       I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 199, 261, 331,
                The student will revise by creating precision and 399; The Writing Process, 448-451; using
                interest by elaborating ideas through supporting      supporting details, 365, 399; supporting
                details (e.g., facts, statistics, expert opinions,    details, 255, 365
                anecdotes), a variety of sentence structures,
                creative language devices, and modifying word
                choices using resources and reference materials
LA.8.3.3.3      (e.g., dictionary, thesaurus); and                                                                    I     X   X   X
                The student will revise by applying appropriate        SE/TE: Six Traits of Writing Checklist, 63,
                tools or strategies to evaluate and refine the draft   129, 199, 261, 331, 399; Rubrics for
LA.8.3.3.4      (e.g., peer review, checklists, rubrics).              Writing, 452-454                               I     X   X   X
                The student will revise by reviewing for content,      SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 199, 261, 331,
                focus, organization, and word choice, and use of       399; The Writing Process, 448-451
                simple and compound sentences to express
LA.8.3.3.In.a   ideas;                                                                                                I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 199, 261, 331,
                The student will revise by improving connections       399; The Writing Process, 448-451
                between main ideas and details and modifying
LA.8.3.3.In.b   details to communicate the purpose;                                                                   I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 199, 261, 331,
                The student will revise by rearranging or changing 399; The Writing Process, 448-451
                words and sentences to clarify meaning or add
                interest using resources and reference materials
LA.8.3.3.In.c   to select more precise vocabulary; and                                                                I     X   X
                The student will revise by using tools and         SE/TE: Writing Checklist, 63, 129, 199,
                strategies (e.g., checklists, rubrics, dictionary, 261, 331, 399; Rubrics for Writing, 452-
LA.8.3.3.In.d   teacher review, peer review) to improve writing.   454                                                I     X   X
                                                                   Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                The student will revise by reviewing the draft for individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129,
                clarity of content, organization, or word choice,  199, 261, 331, 399; The Writing Process,
LA.8.3.3.Su.a   and use of complete sentences to express ideas; 448-451                                               I     X   X
                                                                   Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                   individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129,
                The student will revise by improving connections 199, 261, 331, 399; The Writing Process,
LA.8.3.3.Su.b   between main idea and details with prompting;      448-451                                            I     X   X

                                                                Grade 8                                                             Page 89
SSS STANDARD/          STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT           DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                     I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                           Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                           individual needs: SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129,
                       The student will revise by adding descriptive       199, 261, 331, 399; The Writing Process,
LA.8.3.3.Su.c          words or details; and                               448-451                                           I     X   X
                                                                           Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                       The student will revise by using tools, strategies, individual needs: SE/TE: Writing
                       and resources to improve the draft (e.g., teacher Checklist, 63, 129, 199, 261, 331, 399;
LA.8.3.3.Su.d          review, peer review, dictionary).                   Rubrics for Writing, 452-454                      I     X   X
                                                                           SE/TE: Revise, 63, 129, 199, 261, 331,
                       The student will adjust information communicated 399; The Writing Process, 448-451; Add’l
                       about familiar persons, objects, activities, or     TE: Differentiated Instruction, 63, 129, 199,
                       events when necessary by changing or                261, 331, 399
LA.8.3.3.Pa.a          rearranging pictures, symbols, or words.                                                              I     X

Editing for Language   Standard: The student will edit and correct the
Conventions            draft for standard language conventions.
                       The student will edit for correct use of spelling,     SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                       using spelling rules, orthographic patterns,           262, 332, 402; Spelling lessons will aid
                       generalizations, knowledge of root words,              students with this skill, for examples see:
                       prefixes, suffixes, and knowledge of Greek and         7, 139, 209, 247, 369
                       Latin root words and using a dictionary,
LA.8.3.4.1             thesaurus, or other resources as necessary;                                                           I     X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use                  SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                       of capitalization, including names of academic         262, 332, 402; Grammar Handbook:
                       courses (e.g., Algebra I) and proper adjectives        Capitalization, 433-435
LA.8.3.4.2             (e.g., German shepherd, Italian restaurant);                                                          I     X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use                  SE/TE: Punctuation, 296, 348; Edit and
                       of punctuation, including commas, colons,              Proofread, 64, 130, 200, 262, 332, 402;
LA.8.3.4.3             semicolons, quotation marks, and apostrophes;          Grammar Handbook, 428-433                      I     X   X   X
                                                                              SE/TE: Grammar Focus, 16, 30, 42, 56,
                       The student will edit for correct use of the eight     82, 94, 106, 122, 150, 162, 178, 192, 216,
                       parts of speech (noun, pronoun, verb, adverb,          230, 242, 254, 280, 296, 308, 324, 348,
                       adjective, conjunction, preposition, interjection),    364, 380, 392; Edit and Proofread, 64,
                       regular and irregular verbs, and pronoun               130, 200, 262, 332, 402; Grammar
LA.8.3.4.4             agreement; and                                         Handbook, 418-427                              I     X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use                  SE/TE: Noun/Pronoun Agreement, 364;
                       of subject/verb agreement, noun/pronoun                Subject-Verb Agreement, 242; Edit and
LA.8.3.4.5             agreement.                                             Proofread, 64, 130, 200, 262, 332, 402         I     X   X   X
                       The student will edit for correct use of spelling of   SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                       high frequency words, phonetically regular words       262, 332, 402; Spelling lessons will aid
                       using spelling rules and orthographic patterns,        students with this skill, for examples see:
                       and unknown words verified with a dictionary or        7, 139, 209, 247, 369
LA.8.3.4.In.a          other resource;                                                                                       I     X   X




                                                                       Grade 8                                                             Page 90
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will edit for correct use of            SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                capitalization, including proper nouns, the         262, 332, 402; Grammar Handbook:
                pronoun “I,” days of the week and months of the     Capitalization, 433-435
LA.8.3.4.In.b   year, and initial word of sentences;                                                                I     X   X
                The student will edit for correct use of end         SE/TE: Quotations, 296; Edit and
                punctuation, quotation marks in dialogue, and        Proofread, 64, 130, 200, 262, 332, 402;
LA.8.3.4.In.c   commas in dates;                                     Grammar Handbook, 428-433                      I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                The student will edit for correct use of singular    262, 332, 402; Grammar Handbook, 418-
LA.8.3.4.In.d   and plural nouns; and                                419                                            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Tense, 106, 308, 324; Edit and
                The student will edit for correct use of verb tense Proofread, 64, 130, 200, 262, 332, 402;
LA.8.3.4.In.e   and complete sentences.                              Grammar Handbook, 421-422                      I     X   X
                The student will edit for correct use of spelling of SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                phonetically regular and high frequency words,       262, 332, 402; Spelling lessons will aid
                using a word bank, dictionary, or other resource     students with this skill, for examples see:
LA.8.3.4.Su.a   as necessary;                                        7, 139, 209, 247, 369                          I     X   X
                The student will edit for correct use of             SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                capitalization, including proper nouns, the          262, 332, 402; Grammar Handbook:
                pronoun “I,” initial word of sentences, and days of Capitalization, 433-435
LA.8.3.4.Su.b   the week;                                                                                           I     X   X
                The student will edit for correct use of end         SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                punctuation (period and question mark) for           262, 332, 402; Grammar Handbook, 428-
LA.8.3.4.Su.c   sentences;                                           433                                            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Edit and Proofread, 64, 130, 200,
                The student will edit for correct use of singular    262, 332, 402; Grammar Handbook, 418-
LA.8.3.4.Su.d   and plural nouns; and                                419                                            I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Sentences, 122, 192; Edit and
                The student will edit for correct use of complete    Proofread, 64, 130, 200, 262, 332, 402;
LA.8.3.4.Su.e   sentences.                                           Grammar Handbook, 426-427                      I     X   X
                The student will adjust information communicated For related material see: SE/TE: Edit and
                about familiar persons, objects, activities, or      Proofread, 64, 130, 200, 262, 332, 402
                events when necessary by selecting different
LA.8.3.4.Pa.a   pictures, symbols, or words.                                                                        I     X
                Standard: The student will write a final
Publishing      product for the intended audience.
                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                                                                     403; The Writing Process, 448-451; How
                The student will prepare writing using technology to Use Technology in Writing, 467; Add’l
                in a format appropriate to audience and purpose TE: Word Processing, T13, T157, T225
LA.8.3.5.1      (e.g., manuscript, multimedia);                                                                     I     X   X   X




                                                               Grade 8                                                            Page 91
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                     SE/TE: Write Help-Wanted Ad, 125;
                                                                     Recipe, 195; Newspaper Article, 395;
                                                                     instructions, 151; Personal Letter, 123;
                                                                     Letter to the Editor, 309; Research Report,
                The student will use elements of spacing and         398–403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                design for graphics (e.g., tables, drawings, charts, Writing Letters, 455-456; How to Use
                graphs) when applicable to enhance the               Graphic Organizers, 444; Add’l TE: Word
LA.8.3.5.2      appearance of the document; and                      Processing, T13, T157, T225                    I     X   X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                                                                    403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                                                                    Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                                                                    107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                The student will share the writing with the         243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.3.5.3      intended audience.                                  381, 393                                        I     X   X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                The student will prepare writing appropriate for the 403; The Writing Process, 448-451; How
LA.8.3.5.In.a   audience and purpose;                                to Use Technology in Writing, 467              I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Write Help-Wanted Ad, 125;
                                                                     Recipe, 195; Newspaper Article, 395;
                                                                     instructions, 151; Personal Letter, 123;
                The student will use margins and spacing to          Letter to the Editor, 309; Research Report,
                indicate paragraphs and other key features of text 398–403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                and graphics or illustrations as needed to           Writing Letters, 455-456; How to Use
LA.8.3.5.In.b   enhance writing; and                                 Graphic Organizers, 444                        I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                                                                    403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                                                                    Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                                                                    107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                The student will share writing with the intended    243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.3.5.In.c   audience.                                           381, 393                                        I     X   X
                The student will prepare writing appropriate to the SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
LA.8.3.5.Su.a   purpose;                                            403; The Writing Process, 448-451               I     X   X
                                                                    For related information see: SE/TE: Write
                                                                    Help-Wanted Ad, 125; Recipe, 195;
                                                                    Newspaper Article, 395; instructions, 151;
                                                                    Personal Letter, 123; Letter to the Editor,
                                                                    309; Research Report, 398–403; The
                The student will use required spacing and           Writing Process, 448-451; Writing Letters,
                margins and graphics or illustrations to support    455-456; How to Use Graphic Organizers,
LA.8.3.5.Su.b   written text;                                       444                                             I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                                                                    403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                                                                    Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                                                                    107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                The student will share writing with the intended    243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.3.5.Su.c   audience.                                           381, 393                                        I     X   X

                                                              Grade 8                                                             Page 92
SSS STANDARD/                   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                          PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT                    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                   I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                                      Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                                      individual needs: SE/TE: Writing Activities,
                                The student will effectively communicate              17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95, 107, 123, 151, 163,
                                information about familiar persons, objects,          179, 193, 217, 231, 243, 255, 281, 297,
                                activities, or events using pictures, symbols, or     309, 330, 349, 365, 381, 393
LA.8.3.5.Pa.a                   words.                                                                                                I     X

Grade 8: Writing Applications
                                Standard: The student develops and
Creative                        demonstrates creative writing.
                                                                                   SE/TE: Narrative Writing 83, 95, 107, 123,
                                The student will write narrative accounts with an
                                                                                   128–131, 149, 229; Writing myths, 379;
                                engaging plot (including rising action, conflict,
                                                                                   Writing new endings, 29, 121, 295
                                suspense, climax, falling action and resolution),
                                and that use a range of appropriate strategies and
                                specific narrative action (e.g., dialogue,
                                movement, gestures, expressions) and include
                                well-chosen details using both narrative and
                                descriptive strategies (e.g., relevant dialogue,
                                specific action, physical description, background
                                description, comparison/contrast of characters);
LA.8.4.1.1                      and                                                                                                   I     X   X   X
                                The student will write a variety of expressive     SE/TE: Writing dialogue, 149, 229; Writing
                                forms (e.g., realistic fiction, one-act play,      journal entries, 81, 323; Writing poetry,
                                suspense story, poetry) that according to the type 253, 347
                                of writing employed, incorporate figurative
                                language, rhythm, dialogue, characterization, plot,
LA.8.4.1.2                      and appropriate format.                                                                               I     X   X   X
                                The student will write narratives about events or     SE/TE: Narrative Writing 83, 95, 107, 123,
                                experiences that include a main idea, descriptive     128–131, 149, 229; Writing myths, 379;
                                details, characters, sequence of events, and plot;    Writing new endings, 29, 121, 295
LA.8.4.1.In.a                   and                                                                                                   I     X   X
                                The student will write expressive forms (e.g.,        SE/TE: Writing dialogue, 149, 229; Writing
                                poems, skits, songs) that include rhythm and          journal entries, 81, 323; Writing poetry,
                                rhyme, dialogue, appropriate format, and              253, 347
LA.8.4.1.In.b                   figurative language.                                                                                  I     X   X
                                The student will write narratives about events that   SE/TE: Narrative Writing 83, 95, 107, 123,
                                include a main idea, descriptive details,             128–131, 149, 229; Writing myths, 379;
LA.8.4.1.Su.a                   characters, and a sequence of events; and             Writing new endings, 29, 121, 295               I     X   X
                                The student will write expressive forms (e.g.,        SE/TE: Writing dialogue, 149, 229; Writing
                                poems and skits) that include rhythm and rhyme,       journal entries, 81, 323; Writing poetry,
LA.8.4.1.Su.b                   or dialogue using a guided format.                    253, 347                                        I     X   X
                                                                                      SE/TE: Narrative Writing 83, 95, 107, 123,
                                The student will communicate information that         128–131, 149, 229; Descriptive Writing,
LA.8.4.1.Pa.a                   tells about persons, objects, and activities; and     17, 31, 43, 57, 62–65                           I     X




                                                                               Grade 8                                                              Page 93
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will recognize rhythm, sounds, and        SE/TE: Writing poetry, 253, 347
                words in familiar poetry, dialogue, songs, and
LA.8.4.1.Pa.b   rhymes.                                                                                             I     X

                Standard: The student develops and
                demonstrates technical writing that provides
Informative     information related to real-world tasks.
                                                                      SE/TE: Expository Writing: classifying
                                                                      paragraph, 193; compare and contrast,
                                                                      179; critique, 163; essay, 198, 260–263;
                                                                      instructions, 151; magazine article, 217;
                The student will write in a variety of                plot summary, 231; problem and solution,
                informational/expository forms (e.g., summaries,      243; response to literature, 255;
                procedures, instructions, experiments, rubrics,       Descriptive Writing, 17, 31, 43, 57, 62–65
LA.8.4.2.1      how-to manuals, assembly instructions);                                                             I     X   X   X
                                                                     For related informatoin see: SE/TE: How
                                                                     to Use Graphic Organizers, 444; Graphic
                                                                     Organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31, 40, 41, 43, 57,
                The student will record information (e.g.,           58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93, 95, 104, 107,
                observations, notes, lists, charts, legends) related 123, 124, 128, 151, 160, 163, 179, 193,
                to a topic, including visual aids to organize and    198, 215, 217, 231, 243, 255, 260, 281,
                record information, as appropriate, and attribute    297, 309, 325, 330, 349, 365, 381, 393
LA.8.4.2.2      sources of information;                                                                             I     X   X   X
                The student will write specialized                   SE/TE: Expository Writing: classifying
                informational/expository essays (e.g., process,      paragraph, 193; compare and contrast,
                description, explanation, comparison/contrast,       179; critique, 163; essay, 198, 260–263;
                problem/solution) that include a thesis statement, instructions, 151; magazine article, 217;
                supporting details, an organizational structure      plot summary, 231; problem and solution,
                particular to its type, and introductory, body, and 243; response to literature, 255
LA.8.4.2.3      concluding paragraphs;                                                                              I     X   X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Personal Letter, 123; Letter to the
                The student will write a variety of informal          Editor, 309; Writing Letters, 455-456
                communications (e.g., friendly letters, thank-you
                notes, messages) and formal communications
                (e.g., conventional business letters, invitations)
                that follow a format and that have a clearly stated
                purpose and that include the date, proper
LA.8.4.2.4      salutation, body, closing and signature; and                                                        I     X   X   X
                The student will write detailed directions to         For related informatoin see: SE/TE:
                unfamiliar locations using cardinal and ordinal       Recipe, 195; Instructions, 151; Add’l TE:
                directions, landmarks, streets, and distances, and    Maps, T9, T49, T75, T158, T239, T273,
LA.8.4.2.5      create an accompanying map.                           T291                                          I     X   X   X




                                                               Grade 8                                                            Page 94
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                            PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                      TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                        SE/TE: Expository Writing: classifying
                                                                        paragraph, 193; compare and contrast,
                                                                        179; critique, 163; essay, 198, 260–263;
                                                                        instructions, 151; magazine article, 217;
                The student will write in a variety of expository       plot summary, 231; problem and solution,
LA.8.4.2.In.a   forms (e.g., journal, log, summary);                    243; response to literature, 255               I     X   X
                                                                        For related informatoin see: SE/TE: How
                                                                        to Use Graphic Organizers, 444; Graphic
                                                                        Organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31, 40, 41, 43, 57,
                                                                        58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93, 95, 104, 107,
                                                                        123, 124, 128, 151, 160, 163, 179, 193,
                The student will record information (e.g., lists,       198, 215, 217, 231, 243, 255, 260, 281,
                map labels, charts, graphs, legends) related to a       297, 309, 325, 330, 349, 365, 381, 393
LA.8.4.2.In.b   topic;                                                                                                 I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Expository Writing: classifying
                                                                        paragraph, 193; compare and contrast,
                                                                        179; critique, 163; essay, 198, 260–263;
                The student will write expository paragraph that        instructions, 151; magazine article, 217;
                includes a topic sentence, supporting details and       plot summary, 231; problem and solution,
LA.8.4.2.In.c   relevant information;                                   243; response to literature, 255               I     X   X
                The student will compose a friendly letter that         SE/TE: Personal Letter, 123; Letter to the
                includes a heading, salutation, body, closing, and      Editor, 309; Writing Letters, 455-456
                signature, and write a formal letter using a model;
LA.8.4.2.In.d   and                                                                                                    I     X   X
                The student will write functional text (e.g., three-    SE/TE: Recipe, 195; Instructions, 151;
                step instructions or directions, recipes, labels,       Brochure, 125, 195, 257
LA.8.4.2.In.e   posters, graphs/tables).                                                                               I     X   X
                                                                        SE/TE: Expository Writing: classifying
                                                                        paragraph, 193; compare and contrast,
                                                                        179; critique, 163; essay, 198, 260–263;
                                                                        instructions, 151; magazine article, 217;
                The student will write in a variety of expository       plot summary, 231; problem and solution,
LA.8.4.2.Su.a   forms (e.g., daily journal, log, summary);              243; response to literature, 255               I     X   X
                                                                        For related informatoin see: SE/TE: How
                                                                        to Use Graphic Organizers, 444; Graphic
                                                                        Organizers, 14, 15, 17, 31, 40, 41, 43, 57,
                                                                        58, 60, 61, 62, 80, 83, 93, 95, 104, 107,
                                                                        123, 124, 128, 151, 160, 163, 179, 193,
                                                                        198, 215, 217, 231, 243, 255, 260, 281,
                The student will record information (e.g., lists,       297, 309, 325, 330, 349, 365, 381, 393
LA.8.4.2.Su.b   map labels, charts) related to a topic;                                                                I     X   X




                                                                    Grade 8                                                          Page 95
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                     SE/TE: Expository Writing: classifying
                                                                     paragraph, 193; compare and contrast,
                                                                     179; critique, 163; essay, 198, 260–263;
                The student will write expository text that includes instructions, 151; magazine article, 217;
                a topic sentence and relevant information about      plot summary, 231; problem and solution,
LA.8.4.2.Su.c   the topic;                                           243; response to literature, 255               I     X   X
                The student will compose informal invitations,       For related informatoin see: SE/TE:
                friendly messages and thank-you notes using a        Personal Letter, 123; Letter to the Editor,
LA.8.4.2.Su.d   model; and                                           309; Writing Letters, 455-456                  I     X   X
                The student will write functional text (e.g., two-   SE/TE: Recipe, 195; Instructions, 151;
                step directions, labels, basic recipes,              Brochure, 125, 195, 257
LA.8.4.2.Su.e   informational posters).                                                                             I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Extension and Response to
                The student will communicate information about        Literature, 15, 29, 55, 81, 93, 105, 121,
                persons, objects, activities, or events using         149, 161, 177, 191, 229, 241, 253, 279,
LA.8.4.2.Pa.a   pictures, symbols, or words;                          295, 307, 323, 347, 363, 379, 391             I     X
                                                                      SE/TE: Extension and Response to
                                                                      Literature, 15, 29, 55, 81, 93, 105, 121,
                The student will communicate information about        149, 161, 177, 191, 229, 241, 253, 279,
LA.8.4.2.Pa.b   classroom activities;                                 295, 307, 323, 347, 363, 379, 391             I     X
                                                                      SE/TE: Discussion, 15, 29, 55, 81, 93,
                The student will communicate greetings and            105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229, 241,
                invitations to others to engage in an activities; and 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363, 379,
LA.8.4.2.Pa.c   communicate appreciation; and                         391                                           I     X
                                                                      For related material see: SE/TE: In Your
                                                                      Own Words, 14, 40, 80, 104, 160, 190,
LA.8.4.2.Pa.d   The student will express preferences and choices. 214, 240, 278, 306, 362, 390                      I     X

                Standard: The student develops and
                demonstrates persuasive writing that is used
Persuasive      for the purpose of influencing the reader.
                The student will write persuasive text (e.g.,        SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                advertisement, speech, essay, public service         281; letter to the editor, 309; persuasive
                announcement) that establishes and develops a        paragraph, 325; review, 297; speech,
                controlling idea, and supports arguments for the     330–333; Persuasive Argument, 327;
                validity of the proposed idea with detailed          Letter to the Editor, 309; Write Help-
LA.8.4.3.1      evidence; and                                        Wanted Ad, 125                                 I     X   X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                The student will include persuasive techniques    281; letter to the editor, 309; persuasive
                (e.g., word choice, repetition, emotional appeal, paragraph, 325; review, 297; speech,
                hyperbole, appeal to authority, celebrity         330–333; Persuasive Argument, 327;
                endorsement, rhetorical question, irony, symbols, Letter to the Editor, 309; Write Help-
LA.8.4.3.2      glittering generalities, card stacking).          Wanted Ad, 125                                    I     X   X   X




                                                                Grade 8                                                           Page 96
SSS STANDARD/            STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT             DESCRIPTION                                                   TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                              SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                                                                              281; letter to the editor, 309; persuasive
                         The student will select a favorite topic or activity paragraph, 325; review, 297; speech,
                         and write persuasive text (e.g., advertisement,      330–333; Persuasive Argument, 327;
                         message, paragraph) that shows why the topic or Letter to the Editor, 309; Write Help-
LA.8.4.3.In.a            activity is important.                               Wanted Ad, 125                                I     X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Persuasive Writing: advertisement,
                                                                            281; letter to the editor, 309; persuasive
                                                                            paragraph, 325; review, 297; speech,
                         The student will select a favorite topic or activity
                         and write persuasive text (e.g., advertisement,    330–333; Persuasive Argument, 327;
                         poster) that shows why the topic or activity is    Letter to the Editor, 309; Write Help-
LA.8.4.3.Su.a            important.                                         Wanted Ad, 125                                  I     X   X
                         The student will communicate preferences or          SE/TE: Review, 297; Present Persuasive
                         feelings about familiar persons, objects, or actions Argument to Class, 327
LA.8.4.3.Pa.a            in a variety of daily activities.                                                                  I     X
Grade 8: Communication
                         Standard: The student engages in the writing
                         process and writes to communicate ideas and
Penmanship               experiences.
                                                                             Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                             provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                             Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                                                                             107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                         The student will use fluent and legible handwriting 243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.5.1.1               skills.                                             381, 393                                       I     X   X   X
                                                                            Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                            provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                            Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                                                                            107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                                                                            243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.5.1.In.a            The student will use legible handwriting.          381, 393                                        I     X   X
                                                                            Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                            provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                            Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                                                                            107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                         The student will write words and sentences with    243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.5.1.Su.a            proper spacing and sequencing.                     381, 393                                        I     X   X
                                                                            Examples of legible handwriting are
                                                                            provided with each writing activity. SE/TE:
                                                                            Writing Activities, 17, 31, 43, 57, 83, 95,
                                                                            107, 123, 151, 163, 179, 193, 217, 231,
                         The student will use pictures, symbols, or words   243, 255, 281, 297, 309, 330, 349, 365,
LA.8.5.1.Pa.a            to communicate meaning.                            381, 393                                        I     X
                         Standard: The student effectively applies
Listening and Speaking   listening and speaking strategies.



                                                                       Grade 8                                                            Page 97
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I   A
                                                                    SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                    60–61, 126–127, 196–197, 258–259,
                                                                    328–329, 396–397; In Your Own Words,
                                                                    14, 40, 80, 104, 160, 190, 214, 240, 278,
                                                                    306, 362, 390; Discussion, 15, 29, 55, 81,
                                                                    93, 105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229,
                                                                    241, 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363,
                                                                    379, 391; Add’l TE: Listen and Read,
                                                                    Listen and Read, T8, T22, T36, T48, T74,
                                                                    T88, T100, T140, T168, T184, T210, T222,
                The student will demonstrate effective listening
                                                                    T236, T248, T272, T286, T302, T314,
                skills and behaviors for a variety of purposes, and
                                                                    T342, T354, T370, T386
                demonstrate understanding by paraphrasing
LA.8.5.2.1      and/or summarizing;                                                                                  I     X   X   X
                The student will use effective listening and        SE/TE: Discussion, 15, 29, 55, 81, 93,
                speaking strategies for informal and formal         105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229, 241,
                discussions, connecting to and building on the      253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363, 379,
                ideas of a previous speaker and respecting the      391
                viewpoints of others when identifying bias or faulty
LA.8.5.2.2      logic;                                                                                               I     X   X   X
                The student will select and use a variety of           SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                creative oral language techniques for clarity and      60–61, 126–127, 196–197, 258–259,
                effect (e.g., connotation, denotation, hyperbole,      328–329, 396–397
LA.8.5.2.3      understatement);                                                                                     I     X   X   X
                The student will research, organize, and               SE/TE: Oral Report, 396–397; Present
                effectively deliver speeches to entertain, inform,     Persuasive Argument to Class, 327
LA.8.5.2.4      and persuade; and                                                                                    I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: How-to Demonstration, 196–197;
                                                                       News Show, 258–259; Radio Commercial,
                                                                       328–329; Face the Audience, 120, 259,
                                                                       322; Facial Expressions and Gestures,
                                                                       127, 148, 252, 294, 378; Make Eye
                The student will demonstrate language choices,         Contact, 228; Dramatic Reading, 120, 252,
                body language, eye contact, gestures, and              322, 346; Reader's Theater, 28, 54, 92,
                appropriate use of graphics and available              148, 176, 228, 294, 378
LA.8.5.2.5      technology.                                                                                          I     X   X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                       60–61, 126–127, 196–197, 258–259,
                                                                       328–329, 396–397; In Your Own Words,
                                                                       14, 40, 80, 104, 160, 190, 214, 240, 278,
                The student will use effective listening skills and    306, 362, 390; Discussion, 15, 29, 55, 81,
                behaviors for a variety of purposes and                93, 105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229,
                demonstrate understanding through guided               241, 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363,
LA.8.5.2.In.a   retelling and summarizing;                             379, 391                                      I     X   X




                                                                Grade 8                                                            Page 98
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I   A
                The student will use effective listening and         SE/TE: Discussion, 15, 29, 55, 81, 93,
                speaking strategies for informal discussions,        105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229, 241,
                including but not limited to listening responsively, 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363, 379,
                staying on topic, and respecting the viewpoints of 391
LA.8.5.2.In.b   others;                                                                                            I     X   X
                The student will manipulate oral language for        SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                clarity by adding or deleting words to express the 60–61, 126–127, 196–197, 258–259,
LA.8.5.2.In.c   same thought or idea;                                328–329, 396–397                              I     X   X
                The student will gather information and give brief SE/TE: Oral Report, 396–397; Present
LA.8.5.2.In.d   speeches; and                                        Persuasive Argument to Class, 327             I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: How-to Demonstration, 196–197;
                                                                     News Show, 258–259; Radio Commercial,
                                                                     328–329; Face the Audience, 120, 259,
                                                                     322; Facial Expressions and Gestures,
                                                                     127, 148, 252, 294, 378; Make Eye
                                                                     Contact, 228; Dramatic Reading, 120, 252,
                The student will use appropriate language            322, 346; Reader's Theater, 28, 54, 92,
                choices, eye contact, body language, and             148, 176, 228, 294, 378
LA.8.5.2.In.e   gestures when presenting.                                                                          I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                                                                      60–61, 126–127, 196–197, 258–259,
                                                                      328–329, 396–397; In Your Own Words,
                                                                      14, 40, 80, 104, 160, 190, 214, 240, 278,
                The student will use effective listening skills and 306, 362, 390; Discussion, 15, 29, 55, 81,
                behaviors for a variety of purposes and use           93, 105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229,
                guided retelling to identify the topic and supporting 241, 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363,
LA.8.5.2.Su.a   details;                                              379, 391                                     I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Discussion, 15, 29, 55, 81, 93,
                The student will listen attentively, ask questions, 105, 121, 149, 161, 177, 191, 229, 241,
                and make relevant comments about the content in 253, 279, 295, 307, 323, 347, 363, 379,
LA.8.5.2.Su.b   informal discussions and conversations;             391                                            I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Listening and Speaking Workshop,
                The student will choose words and phrases to        60–61, 126–127, 196–197, 258–259,
LA.8.5.2.Su.c   orally express a message for a specified purpose; 328–329, 396–397                                 I     X   X
                The student will give informal oral presentations   SE/TE: Oral Report, 396–397; Present
LA.8.5.2.Su.d   about a topic; and                                  Persuasive Argument to Class, 327              I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: How-to Demonstration, 196–197;
                                                                    News Show, 258–259; Radio Commercial,
                                                                    328–329; Face the Audience, 120, 259,
                                                                    322; Facial Expressions and Gestures,
                                                                    127, 148, 252, 294, 378; Make Eye
                                                                    Contact, 228; Dramatic Reading, 120, 252,
                The student will use appropriate language           322, 346; Reader's Theater, 28, 54, 92,
                choices, body language, and eye contact when        148, 176, 228, 294, 378
LA.8.5.2.Su.e   presenting.                                                                                        I     X   X



                                                             Grade 8                                                             Page 99
SSS STANDARD/                   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                       PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT                    DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                 I/M*   B   I    A
                                                                                    Add’l TE: Listen and Read, Listen and
                                                                                    Read, T8, T22, T36, T48, T74, T88, T100,
                                                                                    T140, T168, T184, T210, T222, T236,
                                The student will listen and respond to verbal       T248, T272, T286, T302, T314, T342,
LA.8.5.2.Pa.a                   messages from a variety of speakers; and            T354, T370, T386                             I     X
                                                                                 For related information see: SE/TE:
                             The student will communicate information or         Listening and Speaking Workshop, 60–61,
                             preferences and respond purposefully in a variety 126–127, 196–197, 258–259, 328–329,
LA.8.5.2.Pa.b                of situations.                                      396–397                                         I     X
Grade 8: Information and Media Literacy
                             Standard: The student comprehends the wide
                             array of informational text that is part of our
Informational Text           day to day experiences.
                                                                                 SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                                 use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                                 Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                                 Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                                                                 441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                                                                 Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
                                                                                 459; Technology Handbook, 463-467; also
                                                                                 see: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                                 184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                                                                                 Social Studies Text, 8–13, 74–78,
                                                                                 156–159, 210–213, 272–277, 302–305;
                             The student will explain how text features (e.g.,
                                                                                 Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                             charts, maps, diagrams, sub-headings, captions,
                                                                                 T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
                             illustrations, graphs) aid the reader's
                                                                                 T334, T336, T404
LA.8.6.1.1                   understanding;                                                                                      I     X   X    X
                                                                                 SE/TE: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                             The student will use information from a variety of 184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                             consumer (e.g., warranties, instructional           Social studies text, 8–13, 74–78, 156–159,
                             manuals), workplace (e.g., applications, contracts) 210–213, 272–277, 302–305; Interview,
                             and other documents to explain a situation and      112–113; Letter, 342–343; Filling in Forms,
LA.8.6.1.2                   justify a decision; and                             457-458                                         I     X   X    X
                                The student will create a technical manual or        SE/TE: Recipe, 195; Instructions, 151;
LA.8.6.1.3                      solve a problem.                                     Problem and Solution, 243                   I     X   X    X
                                                                                     SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                                     use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                                     Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                The student will locate information provided in text Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                                features (e.g., table of contents, headings,         441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                                subheadings, charts and maps, text styles, index, Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
LA.8.6.1.In.a                   glossary); and                                       459; Technology Handbook, 463-467           I     X   X




                                                                                Grade 8                                                        Page 100
SSS STANDARD/      STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                      PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT       DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                     I/M*   B   I    A
                                                                      SE/TE: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                                                                      184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                   The student will identify and use multiple sources Social studies text, 8–13, 74–78, 156–159,
                   of information (e.g., consumer, workplace, other   210–213, 272–277, 302–305; Interview,
                   real-world situations) to carry out procedures,    112–113; Letter, 342–343; Filling in Forms,
LA.8.6.1.In.b      solve problems, and make decisions.                457-458                                           I     X   X
                                                                            SE/TE: Strategies: preview, 7; skim, 73;
                                                                            use visuals, 353; How to Use Reference
                                                                            Books, 412-413; Skills and Learning
                                                                            Strategies, 416; Maps and Diagrams, 440-
                   The student will identify information in text            441; Graphs, 442-443; Graphic
                   features (e.g., title, illustrations and graphics, table Organizers, 444; Conducting Research,
LA.8.6.1.Su.a      of contents, headings); and                              459; Technology Handbook, 463-467           I     X   X
                                                                     SE/TE: Science Text, 36–39, 100–103,
                   The student will use easy-to-read informational   184–189, 236–239, 354–361, 386–389;
                   materials (e.g., consumer, workplace, other real- Social studies text, 8–13, 74–78, 156–159,
                   world situations) with graphics to follow         210–213, 272–277, 302–305; Interview,
                   instructions, solve problems, make decisions, and 112–113; Letter, 342–343; Filling in Forms,
LA.8.6.1.Su.b      perform tasks.                                    457-458                                            I     X   X
                   The student will use familiar pictures, symbols, or Add’l TE: Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68,
                   words to complete consumer or other real-world      T132, T134, T202, T204, T264, T266,
LA.8.6.1.Pa.a      tasks.                                              T334, T336, T404                                 I     X
                   Standard: The student uses a systematic
                   process for collecting, processing, and
Research Process   presenting information.
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                                                                       393, 398–403. See also: Researching
                                                                       Current Events, 161; Research Activities,
                                                                       15, 41, 60, 105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241,
                                                                       279, 307, 391; Conducting Research, 459;
                   The student will select a topic and develop a
                                                                       How to Use the Internet for Research, 464;
                   search plan with multiple research strategies, and
                                                                       How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                   apply evaluative criteria (e.g., scope and depth of
                   content, authority, reputation of author/publisher, 465; Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113,
                   objectivity, freedom from bias) to assess           T119, T147, T249, T251, T303, T377,
LA.8.6.2.1         appropriateness of resources;                       T387                                             I     X   X    X
                                                                           SE/TE: Research Activities, 15, 41, 60,
                                                                           105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241, 279, 307,
                                                                           391; Conducting Research, 459; How to
                   The student will assess, organize, synthesize, and Use the Internet for Research, 464; How to
                   evaluate the validity and reliability of information in Evaluate the Quality of Information, 465;
                   text, using a variety of techniques by examining        Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113, T119,
                   several sources of information, including both          T147, T249, T251, T303, T377, T387
LA.8.6.2.2         primary and secondary sources;                                                                       I     X   X    X




                                                                  Grade 8                                                             Page 101
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                  TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I    A
                                                                      SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                The student will write an informational report that   393, 398–403
                includes a focused topic, appropriate facts and
                relevant details, a logical sequence, a concluding
LA.8.6.2.3      statement, and a list of sources used; and                                                            I     X   X    X
                The student will understand the importance of          SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 381,
                legal and ethical practices, including laws            383; Research Report, 398-403; Citing
                regarding libel, slander, copyright, and plagiarism Sources, 461-462
                in the use of mass media and digital sources,
                know the associated consequences, and comply
LA.8.6.2.4      with the law.                                                                                         I     X   X    X
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                                                                       393, 398–403. See also: Researching
                                                                       Current Events, 161; Research Activities,
                                                                       15, 41, 60, 105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241,
                                                                       279, 307, 391; Conducting Research, 459;
                                                                       How to Use the Internet for Research, 464;
                                                                       How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                The student will select a topic, adapt a
                predetermined search plan and use evaluative           465; Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113,
                criteria (e.g., relevance, special features) to locate T119, T147, T249, T251, T303, T377,
LA.8.6.2.In.a   information in references and other resources;         T387                                           I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Research Activities, 15, 41, 60,
                                                                      105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241, 279, 307,
                                                                      391; Conducting Research, 459; How to
                The student will record and organize information      Use the Internet for Research, 464; How to
                by topic using multiple sources (e.g., digital and    Evaluate the Quality of Information, 465;
                print texts, maps, charts, graphs, photographs)       Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113, T119,
                and check factual information in reference            T147, T249, T251, T303, T377, T387
LA.8.6.2.In.b   materials;                                                                                            I     X   X
                The student will write a report that includes main    SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                idea(s) and relevant details in an organized          393, 398–403
                sequence, a concluding statement, and a list of
LA.8.6.2.In.c   sources used; and                                                                                     I     X   X
                                                                      SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 381,
                The student will record bibliographic data using a    383; Research Report, 398-403; Citing
                template and identify ethical practices for using     Sources, 461-462
                information (e.g., knowing the difference between
LA.8.6.2.In.d   copying material from a text, using own words).                                                       I     X   X




                                                               Grade 8                                                              Page 102
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                      PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                      I/M*   B   I    A
                                                                   SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                                                                   393, 398–403. See also: Researching
                                                                   Current Events, 161; Research Activities,
                                                                   15, 41, 60, 105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241,
                                                                   279, 307, 391; Conducting Research, 459;
                                                                   How to Use the Internet for Research, 464;
                                                                   How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                The student will select a topic and use a
                predetermined search plan to locate information in 465; Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113,
                teacher-recommended digital or print references T119, T147, T249, T251, T303, T377,
LA.8.6.2.Su.a   or other sources;                                  T387                                               I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Activities, 15, 41, 60,
                                                                       105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241, 279, 307,
                                                                       391; Conducting Research, 459; How to
                                                                       Use the Internet for Research, 464; How to
                                                                       Evaluate the Quality of Information, 465;
                The student will read and record information from Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113, T119,
                references or other sources to answer search           T147, T249, T251, T303, T377, T387
LA.8.6.2.Su.b   questions;                                                                                            I     X   X
                The student will write a simple report that includes SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                a title, main idea and details, relevant illustrations 393, 398–403
                and graphics, a closing statement, and a list of
LA.8.6.2.Su.c   sources used; and                                                                                     I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 381,
                The student will record the titles of references or 383; Research Report, 398-403; Citing
                other sources used to answer search questions          Sources, 461-462
                and identify ethical practices for using information
LA.8.6.2.Su.d   (e.g., not copying from another student).                                                             I     X   X
                                                                       SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                                                                       393, 398–403. See also: Researching
                                                                       Current Events, 161; Research Activities,
                                                                       15, 41, 60, 105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241,
                                                                       279, 307, 391; Conducting Research, 459;
                                                                       How to Use the Internet for Research, 464;
                                                                       How to Evaluate the Quality of Information,
                The student will select a person or object to learn 465; Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113,
                about and use a teacher-recommended source for T119, T147, T249, T251, T303, T377,
LA.8.6.2.Pa.a   information;                                           T387                                           I     X
                                                                     SE/TE: Research Activities, 15, 41, 60,
                                                                     105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241, 279, 307,
                                                                     391; Conducting Research, 459; How to
                                                                     Use the Internet for Research, 464; How to
                                                                     Evaluate the Quality of Information, 465;
                The student will obtain information about a          Add’l TE: Internet, T11, T53. 113, T119,
                selected person or object and seek assistance to     T147, T249, T251, T303, T377, T387
LA.8.6.2.Pa.b   clarify meaning of pictures, symbols, or words;                                                       I     X



                                                               Grade 8                                                              Page 103
SSS STANDARD/    STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                        PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT     DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                  I/M*   B   I    A
                 The student will communicate information about       SE/TE: Research Writing 349, 365, 381,
                 persons, objects, activities, or events using        393, 398–403
LA.8.6.2.Pa.c    pictures, symbols, or words; and                                                                   I     X
                                                                      SE/TE: Quotations and Citations, 381,
                 The student will identify objects, books or print    383; Research Report, 398-403; Citing
LA.8.6.2.Pa.d    material that belong to others.                      Sources, 461-462                              I     X
                 Standard: The student develops and
                 demonstrates an understanding of media
                 literacy as a life skill that is integral to
Media Literacy   informed decision making.
                                                                      SE/TE: Artwork, 59; Make a Map, 59;
                                                                      Brochure, 125, 195, 257; Viewing and
                                                                      Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
                                                                      the Quality of Information, 465; Add’l TE:
                                                                      Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T132, T134,
                 The student will analyze ways that production        T202, T204, T264, T266, T334, T336,
                 elements (e.g., graphics, color, motion, sound,      T404. A Video Program DVD features
                 digital technology) affect communication across      background information about the theme.
LA.8.6.3.1       the media;                                                                                         I     X   X    X
                                                                      SE/TE: Artwork, 59; Make a Map, 59;
                                                                      Brochure, 125, 195, 257; Viewing and
                                                                      Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
                                                                      the Quality of Information, 465; Add’l TE:
                 The student will demonstrate the ability to select   Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T132, T134,
                 and ethically use print and nonprint media           T202, T204, T264, T266, T334, T336,
                 appropriate for the purpose, occasion, and           T404. A Video Program DVD features
                 audience to develop into a formal presentation;      background information about the theme.
LA.8.6.3.2       and                                                                                                I     X   X    X
                 The student will distinguish between propaganda    SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 440;
                 and ethical reasoning strategies in print and      Radio Commercial, 188–189; Persuasive
LA.8.6.3.3       nonprint media.                                    Argument, 32                                    I     X   X    X
                                                                    SE/TE: Artwork, 59; Make a Map, 59;
                                                                    Brochure, 125, 195, 257; Viewing and
                                                                    Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
                                                                    the Quality of Information, 465; Add’l TE:
                                                                    Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T132, T134,
                                                                    T202, T204, T264, T266, T334, T336,
                 The student will identify how production elements T404. A Video Program DVD features
                 (e.g., graphics, color, sound) are used to enhance background information about the theme.
LA.8.6.3.In.a    communication in media;                                                                            I     X   X
                                                                    SE/TE: Artwork, 59; Make a Map, 59;
                 The student will use media with graphics, sound, Brochure, 125, 195, 257; Viewing and
                 or color to communicate information on a topic;    Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
LA.8.6.3.In.b    and                                                the Quality of Information, 465                 I     X   X




                                                                 Grade 8                                                          Page 104
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                      PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                               TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                      I/M*   B   I    A
                The student will identify persuasive techniques   SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 440;
                (e.g., word choice, emotional appeal, appeal to   Radio Commercial, 188–189; Persuasive
LA.8.6.3.In.c   authority) in text.                               Argument, 32                                       I     X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Artwork, 59; Make a Map, 59;
                                                                  Brochure, 125, 195, 257; Viewing and
                                                                  Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
                                                                  the Quality of Information, 465; Add’l TE:
                                                                  Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T132, T134,
                                                                  T202, T204, T264, T266, T334, T336,
                                                                  T404. A Video Program DVD features
                The student will recognize production elements of background information about the theme.
LA.8.6.3.Su.a   color, sound, and motion used in media;                                                              I     X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Artwork, 59; Make a Map, 59;
                                                                  Brochure, 125, 195, 257; Viewing and
                The student will use media with sound or color to Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
LA.8.6.3.Su.b   complete tasks; and                               the Quality of Information, 465                    I     X   X
                The student will identify examples of basic       SE/TE: Viewing and Representing, 440;
                persuasive techniques (e.g., emotional appeal,    Radio Commercial, 188–189; Persuasive
LA.8.6.3.Su.c   appeal to authority).                             Argument, 32                                       I     X   X
                                                                  SE/TE: Artwork, 59; Make a Map, 59;
                                                                  Brochure, 125, 195, 257; Viewing and
                                                                  Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
                                                                  the Quality of Information, 465; Add’l TE:
                                                                  Visual Literacy, T2, T66, T68, T132, T134,
                                                                  T202, T204, T264, T266, T334, T336,
                                                                  T404. A Video Program DVD features
                The student will respond to production elements background information about the theme.
LA.8.6.3.Pa.a   of motion, sound, and color used in media; and                                                       I     X
                                                                    Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                    individual needs: SE/TE: Viewing and
                                                                    Representing, 440-444; How to Evaluate
LA.8.6.3.Pa.b   The student will use media to obtain information.   the Quality of Information, 465                  I     X
                Standard: The student develops the essential
                technology skills for using and understanding
                conventional and current tools, materials and
Technology      processes.
                                                                     SE/TE: Internet Use, 15, 41, 60, 105, 161,
                                                                     177, 191, 215, 241, 279, 307, 391;
                                                                     Technology Handbook, 463-467; Add’l TE:
                The student will use appropriate available           Study Skills: Internet, T11, T53. 113, T119,
                technologies to enhance communication and            T147, T249, T251, T303, T377, T387; A
                achieve a purpose (e.g., video, digital technology); Video Program DVD features background
LA.8.6.4.1      and                                                  information about the theme.                    I     X   X    X




                                                              Grade 8                                                              Page 105
SSS STANDARD/   STANDARD/BENCHMARK/ACCESS POINT                         PAGE(S) OR LOCATION(S) WHERE
ACCESS POINT    DESCRIPTION                                                 TAUGHT IN MAJOR TOOL                    I/M*   B   I    A
                The student will evaluate and apply digital tools    SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                (e.g., word, processing, multimedia authoring,       403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                web tools, graphic organizers) to publications and   Technology Handbook, 463-467; Add’l TE:
LA.8.6.4.2      presentations.                                       Word Processing, T13, T157, T225                I     X   X    X
                                                                     SE/TE: Internet Use, 15, 41, 60, 105, 161,
                                                                     177, 191, 215, 241, 279, 307, 391;
                                                                     Technology Handbook, 463-467; Add’l TE:
                                                                     Study Skills: Internet, T11, T53. 113, T119,
                                                                     T147, T249, T251, T303, T377, T387; A
                The student will use appropriate available           Video Program DVD features background
LA.8.6.4.In.a   technologies to enhance communication; and           information about the theme.                    I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                                                                   403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
                The student will select and use technology tools   Technology Handbook, 463-467; Add’l TE:
LA.8.6.4.In.b   to publish and present information on a topic.     Word Processing, T13, T157, T225                  I     X   X
                The student will use appropriate available         SE/TE: Internet Use, 15, 41, 60, 105, 161,
LA.8.6.4.Su.a   technologies to enhance communication; and         177, 191, 215, 241, 279, 307, 391                 I     X   X
                                                                   SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131, 201, 263, 333,
                The student will use technology tools to present a 403; The Writing Process, 448-451;
LA.8.6.4.Su.b   topic or story with text and graphics.             Technology Handbook, 463-467                      I     X   X
                                                                   Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                   individual needs: SE/TE: Internet Use, 15,
                The student will use appropriate available         41, 60, 105, 161, 177, 191, 215, 241, 279,
LA.8.6.4.Pa.a   technologies to enhance communication; and         307, 391                                          I     X
                                                                   Teacher can adapt the following to meet
                                                                   individual needs: SE/TE: Publish, 65, 131,
                The student will use a technology tool to          201, 263, 333, 403; The Writing Process,
                communicate information to a familiar person in    448-451; Technology Handbook, 463-467
LA.8.6.4.Pa.b   various settings.                                                                                    I     X




                                                             Grade 8                                                               Page 106

								
To top